Lesson plan for grade 7 by Van Channak

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 1: At a new school Unit 1: Meeting new friends Lesson A: Meeting new friends - How are you today? Page: 8-9 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Introducing yourself & others ~ Saying hello & goodbye ~ Giving information about yourself & others II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce themselves & others, say hello & goodbye & give information related to themselves & other people through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students that we are going to play a game called „Play Buzz‟. 2. Gives instructions: - Writes the number „2‟ on the board. - Tells students to count up to 10, but for every multiple of 2, they say „buzz’ (e.g. 1, buzz, 3, buzz, 5, buzz…). Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: Play „Buzz‟ To focus on reviewing the students the numbers 1-20.

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

1. Listen carefully.

2. Listen carefully & raise questions if they are not sure.

Writes another number on the board (e.g. 3) - Tells students to count up to 20, but for every multiple of 3, they say ‘buzz’ (e.g. 1, 2, buzz, 4, 5, buzz…). - Puts students into groups of 4/5. - Writes another number on the board. - In groups, students take turns counting up one number at a time, but for any multiple of that number, they say ‘buzz’. 3. Gives a modeling. 4. Gets students to play the game for 3 mins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

3. Whole class tries on the game. 4. Whole class plays the game.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson A: Meeting New Friends – How are you today?

2. Gives instructions: - Asks students some questions such as: what‟s your name? How old are you? How are you to day? Where are you from? - Gets students to ask the above questions to their partner. 3. Asks instructions checking questions & gives a time limit of 1 min. - Would I like you to work alone or in pairs? - How many minutes do you have?

Activity 1: (2 mins) Lead in

1. Gives instructions: - Tells students to look at the pictures & to say anything they think they will hear about them. E.g. he is a boy. - Tells students they are going to listen & match the names to the pictures. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. - What do I want you to do? - How many times do you have?

Activity 2: (5 mins) Match

3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partner. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class responds.

2. Listen carefully & raise questions if they are not sure.

3. Whole class responds:

In pairs

Have 1 min Whole class starts to work.

1. Look at the pictures

Listen carefully.

2. Whole class responds:

Listen & match Have 3 mins

3. Compare their answers with their partner. 2

4. Asks & answer the questions as the whole class. 1. Gives instructions: - Tells students to work with a partner. - Tells students to try to remember/guess who says the sentences in activity 3. Do the first one together as a class. - Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. - Tells students to listen and check. - Tells students to compare their answers with their partner/group. - Asks and answers the questions as a class. 1. Tells students they are going to listen and repeat after the tape. 1. Puts students in group of 4. Tells students to use the sentence prompts in activity 7. 2. Tells students to use their own information. 3. Tells students to take it in turns introducing themselves. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives give a time limit of 5 mins. 1. Shows the picture of Miss Mom, the teacher from the book. 2. Asks student guess who she is. Use questions (e.g. Is she a teacher? Is she Daraâ&#x20AC;&#x;s friend?) 3. Tells students they are going to listen to the conversation to find out. 4. Asks instruction checking question. 1. Tells students to work a partner. 2. Tells students to try and remember/guess what order the sentences are in. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Tells students to listen and check. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

4. Whole class responds.

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen and repeat Activity 4: (8 mins) Free practice

1. Whole class responds: - Listen carefully and raise questions if they are not sure. - Remember/guess.

Work in pairs & have 2 mins.

Listen carefully.

Compare answers.

Whole class responds.

1. Listen and repeat loudly.

1. Listen carefully and raise questions if they are not sure. 2. Own information. 3. Take turns introducing themselves. 4. Work in group of 4 & have 5 mins.

Activity 5: (5 mins) 1. Look at the picture. Lead in and listening for the big idea 2. Answer

3. Listen carefully.

4. Listening

Activity 6: (3 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Listen carefully 2. Remember/guess.

3. Work in pairs 4. Listen 3

5. Tells students to compare with their group/partner. 6. Asks and answers questions as a class. 1. Puts students in group of 3. Tells students to practice the conversations in their groups. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 5 mins. 3. If the groups finish early, tells them to have the conversation again! No groups should be quiet!

1. Asks some questions from today‟s lesson. 2. Listens to students‟ answers.

1. Gets students to write about themselves. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 1 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

5. Compare answers 6. Whole class responds

Activity 7: (8 mins) Free practice

1. Listen carefully & raise question if they are not sure. 2. Work in group of 3 & have 5 mins 3. No groups should be quiet!

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins) What‟s your name? How old are you? Where are you from? Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

1. Listen carefully. 2. Answer the questions.

1. Listen and take note of the homework. 2. Listen and take note.

Reminders:

Goodbye!

3. Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: .............................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 1: At a new school Unit 1: Meeting new friends Lesson B: Meeting new friends - My new friends Pages: 10-11 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Introducing yourself & others ~ Saying hello & goodbye ~ Giving information about yourself & others II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce themselves & others, say hello & goodbye & give information related to themselves & other people through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students that we are going to play a game called „Pass the ball‟. 2. Gives instructions: - Students pass along a „ball‟ or any object while singing/playing music. - When the music stop, the student holding the ball has to introduce himself/herself (e.g. I am Phalla. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: „Pass the ball‟ To focus on introducing student‟s information.

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

1. Listen carefully.

2. Listen carefully & raise questions if they are not sure.

I‟m 13 years old.). 3. Gives a modeling. 4. Gets students to play the game for 3 mins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 2. Gives instructions: - Show students pictures of Dara, Avorng, Sophal, and Bopha from the student‟s book. - Tells students to try and remember as much as they can about the characters. Students should talk in their groups. - Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 3 mins. - Review information as a class. 1. Tells students they are going to write and draw pictures of themselves. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Tells students to show and tell their work in their groups.

3. Whole class tries on the game. 4. Whole class plays the game.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (35 mins) Lesson B: Meeting New Friends – My new friends Activity 1: (2 mins) Review

2. Listen carefully & raise questions if they are not sure.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Personalization

1. Listen carefully & raise questions if they are not sure. 2. In groups & have 5 mins.

3. Whole class starts to work.

1. Gives instructions: - Shows pictures of Dara and Sophall. - Asks: what is Sophall doing? (Introducing about his friends.) - Tells students they are going to read quickly and find out. - Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. - Tells students to compare their answers with their partner/groups. - Asks and answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students read for the big idea

1. Does the first question together as a class. Have students to point where the answer is in the text. 2. Tells students to do the other questions in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit

Activity 4: (8 mins) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class responds.

1. Listen and raise questions if they have any. - Look at the pictures

Read quickly.

Have 3 mins.

Compare answers.

Whole class responds.

1. Point to the answers.

2. Do other questions. 3. Have 5 mins 6

of 5 mins. 4. Tells students to complete. 5. Tells students to compare their answers with their partner/group. 6. Checks answers as a class. 1. Tells students to work with their partner. 2. Tells students they are going to write about their partner in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

1. Asks some students some questions about their writing 2. Listens to students answer.

1. Gets students to write about his/her friend. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 1 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

4. Complete the blanks. 5. Compare their answers

Activity 5: (10 mins) Free practice

6. Whole class checks and responds. 1. Work in pairs. 2. Write in notebook.

3. Have 7 mins.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)

1. Listen carefully. 2. Answer the questions.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework: Reminders:

1. Listen and take note of the homework. 2. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

3. Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 1: At a new school Unit 1: Meeting new friends Lesson C: Meeting new friends – More friends Pages: 12-13 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Introducing yourself & others ~ Saying hello & goodbye ~ Giving information about yourself & others II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce themselves & others, say hello & goodbye & give information related to themselves & other people through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students that we are going to play a game called „Ball throwing‟. 2. Gives instructions: - A student throws a ball to another one. - That student has to ask questions (e.g. How are you today? How old are you?) and throw the ball quickly to another one. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: „Ball throwing‟ To focus on asking questions: How are you today? What‟s your name? How old are you? What grade are you in? Where are you from?

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

1. Listen carefully.

2. Listen carefully & raise questions if they are not sure.

Tells students that the ball is hot and if they hold it too long, they lose and have to sit down! 3. Gives a modeling. 4. Gets students to play the game for 3 mins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 2. Gives instructions: - Tells students to look at the photos and decide if the sentences about them are true or false. - Tells students to bet on how sure they are! - Tells groups to take it in turns to read the sentences and say how much they bet for each. - When all students have said their bets, say if the sentence was true or false. - Students add and minus points as they win and lose. - The team that has earned the most number of points at the end of the game is the winner! 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. - Do I want you to work alone or in groups? - How many minutes do you have? 1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Gives instructions: - Tells students that they are going to paly a game and need counters. Students can use anything (erasers, pen, cap etc.) as counter. - Tells students to take it in turns to drop the counter on the pictures of the characters in the book. Then they try to remember who the characters are, and any other information they can recall (e.g. he‟s Dara. He‟s 13 years old.) Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

3. Whole class tries on the game. 4. Whole class plays the game.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (35 mins) Lesson C: Meeting New Friends – More friends Activity 1: (10 mins) True or False Game He is from Phnom Penh. (tick) His name is Dara. (cross) She is 12 years old. (tick) He‟s got 3 eggs. (cross) They‟re friends. (tick)

1. Whole class responds.

2. Listen carefully & raise questions if they are not sure.

3. Whole class responds:

Activity 2: (7 mins) Speaking Practice game

In groups.

Have 4 mins. Whole class plays the game.

Move in group of 4. Listen carefully.

3. Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 7 mins.

Each group plays the game.

1. Tells students to work in groups of 4. 2. Tells students to take turns to introduce one member of their group. Can they remember everything about them? 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 3: (9 mins) Speaking Practice Introducing a friend to the others group. Hello! He is Dara. He is my friend. He is in grade 7. He is 13 years old. He is from Phnom Penh.

1. Tells the students to write about Mr. Sovann using the information in the box individually. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins. - Are you going to write about your friend or Mr. Sovann? - Will you use your own words or the words from the box?

1. Listen carefully. Activity 4: (9 mins) Writing Practice Writing about Mr. Sovann e.g. Hello! This is Mr. Sovann. He is the school principal. He is 50 years old. He is tall. He likes ice cream and he loves his school. - Mr. Sovann.

1. Asks students to look at the “can do” statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the “can do” statements. Tells students not to worry about the ones they don‟t tick.

1. Work in groups of 4. 2. Listen carefully.

3. Member of each group takes turns to introduce a friend to the groups.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (3 mins) I can say my name. I can say how old I am. I can say hell and goodbye I can introduce my friends.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Gets students to write about their Homework: mother. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 2 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

From the box.

1. Listen, look at “can do” statements and pick up in the boxes. 2. Compare with partner. 3. Respond.

1. Listen and take note of the homework. 2. Listen and take note.

3. Say goodbye to the teacher.

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 1: At a new school Unit 2: School around the world Lesson A: School around the world – Too cool for school Pages: 14-15 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Identifying buildings around your school ~ Talking about things that are / aren‟t in your school II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to identify buildings around their school & describe things that are / aren‟t in their school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Asks students to look at the pictures and guess what they will be learning about this lesson. (Schools)

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Step II: Warmer/Review Activity 1: (2 mins) Lead in

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

1. Look at the pictures carefully & answer.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) Lesson A: school around the world – 1. Whole class responds. Too cool for school

1. Tells students to write a-f down side of their notebook. 2. Tells students they will look at the pictures with their partner & try and guess what the pictures are of. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Students listen and check.

Activity 2: (5 mins) New words

1. Tells students to look at the picture. 2. Asks them to talk to their partner about where they think they are from: Malaysia, Australia or Thailand. Tells students to write their guess in their notebook. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 min. 4. Asks 2 or 3 students their ideas. You might want to take a class vote to make things fun.

Activity 3: 3 mins) Students guess

2. Look & guess.

3. Have 3 mins.

4. Listen & check.

1. Listen & look. 2. Guess & write.

2. Have 1 min. . 3. Respond.

1. Gets students to listen. 2. Gets students to compare their answers 3. Asks students the answer. (Australia)

Activity 3: (4 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to write the letters a-f in their notebooks. 2. Tells students they will listen and tick things that are in the school and cross the things that are not. 3. Asks instruction checking instructions. 4. Gets students to listen. 5. Gets students to compare with their partner/group. 6. Asks students the answers.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Asks students to write 1-5 in their notebooks. 2. Tells students that the words they need are in exercise 1. This will help them with their spelling. 3. Tells students to complete the sentences alone.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Controlled practice

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

1. Listen to the tape. 2. Compare answers. 3. Respond.

Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any.

Listen carefully to the tape. Compare answers. Respond.

Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any.

Work individually. 12

4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students compare with their partner/group. 6. Listen & check. 7. Tells students to listen again and repeat after the recording.

Compare answers.

Listen carefully to the tape. Repeat.

Look and complete.

Compare answers.

Respond.

Listen carefully and raise questions if the have any. Write in notebook.

Compare answers.

Listen & check. Listen & repeat.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Write in notebook.

Compare answers.

Listen & check.

1. Asks students to look at the grammar box and the sentences and complete the rules. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Asks students to compare with partner/group. 4. Asks students as a class. Do not discuss Grammatical Terms during feedback.

Activity 6: ( 5 mins) Grammar Presentation

1. Tells students to write the answers in their notebooks. 2. Ask instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Asks students to compare with partner/group. 4. Students listen & check. 5. Students listen & repeat.

Activity 7: (4 mins) Controlled practice

1. Tells students to write the answers to the questions in Activity 7 in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Students compare with partner/group. 4. Students listen & check.

Activity 8: (5 mins) Writing Practice

1. Tells students now they will answer Bopha‟s questions. Play the recording.

Activity 9: (2 mins) Students listen for the answers

Listen & respond.

1. Tells students that they are going to play a guessing game. 2. Have one student help you model the activity. Tell them to choose one picture. Asks them questions such as “Is there a classroom?” Asks 3 questions. Guess the answer. Asks “Am I

Activity 10: (8 mins) Free Speaking Practice

Listen carefully.

Modeling.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

right? 3. Tells students that they are going to paly the same game in groups of 4. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and sets a time limit of 10 mins.

Listen carefully.

Play in groups of 4.

Listen & whole respond.

Thank to the teacher.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: 1. Asks “Is there a classroom in our Assessment and Wrap-up (3 mins) school?” Gets students to shout Is there a classroom in our school? out the answer. Asks a few Is there a library in our school? questions like this. Is there a football field in our 2. Tells students that they have school? done a great job. Thanks students who worked well in group & helped their friends.

1. Tells students that they are expected to have the homework completed by next lesson. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 2 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 1: At a new school Unit 2: School around the world Lesson B: School around the world – A world of schools Pages: 16-17 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Identifying buildings around your school ~ Talking about things that are / aren‟t in your school II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to identify buildings around their school & describe things that are / aren‟t in their school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students to stand up. Tell them they are going to play a game called „It bites‟. The rules of the game are that you throw the ball and say a country. But you are “out” if you 1) hold the ball for more than a second. 2) say a country that someone else has said. 3) drop the ball. 4) throw the ball so that no one can catch it. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Play the game until you have a winner/time is up. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Warmer: „It bites!‟ To focus on reviewing the names of the countries

4. Gives a modeling. 5. Gets students to play the game for 3 mins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 2. Writes: Malaysia, Canada, Australia, English, and Cambodia on the board. 3. Tells students to talk about what they think the places are like with their partners. 4. Asks students their ideas as a class. 1. Tells students to close the book. 2. Tells students they are going to guess where the kids are from. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 1 min. 4. Students talk 5. Asks students where they think the kids from around the world are from. 1. Tells students they are going to read & listen. They need to match the text with the people 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Gets students to do the exercise individually. 4. Students compare with their groups/partners. 5. Asks the students the answers as a class. 1. Writes: She lives in Malaysia. On the board. 2. Asks Is it Jay? Students answer no. Asks Is it Nita? Students answer no. Asks Is it Farah? Students answer Yes. Asks “what do I write here?” Students answer: Farah 3. Gives students 5 mins limit. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Students complete. 6. Students compare with their group/partner. 7. Checks answers as a class. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (35 mins) Lesson B: School around the world – A world of school Lead in: (3 mins)

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read/listen for the big idea

Activity 3: (10 mins) Students read for the answers.

Whole class tries on the game. Whole class plays the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the countries on the board.

Work in pairs.

Respond.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any. Guess

Talking time Respond.

Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any.

Listening & matching.

Do individually.

Compare answers.

Respond.

Look at the board.

Respond.

Complete. Compare answers.

Respond. 16

1. Tells students that they are going to write about them but first they will make notes, which is an important part of the writing process. 2. Tells students to take notes in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Gives students 3 mins limit. 1. Tells students to put their pens down and look at you. 2. Shows students how to do the activity by starting it yourself: My name is Samuth. I‟m from Cambodia. I‟m 27 years old. I like my school. There is a library… 3. Tells students to write about themselves. If students finish before their friends, asks them to draw a picture of them at their school.

1. Asks students to put their pens down. Asks them to read their writing to their partner/group. Sets a time limit of 2 mins. 2. Asks for 2 or 3 people to read to the class. 3. Tells students that they have done a great job. Praises students who tried hard to speak only in English.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Taking notes

Activity 5: (15 mins) Students write

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins)

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Gets students to write about their Homework: brother/sister. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 2 on page 206 in the Reminders: student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any.

Take notes in notebook.

Not taking note in full sentences.

Put their pens down.

Listen carefully to the teacher.

Write & draw.

Listen & put their pens down.

Read to the class.

Thank to the teacher.

Listen and take note of the homework.

Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 1: At a new school Unit 2: School around the world Lesson C: School around the world – My beautiful school Pages: 18-19 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Identifying buildings around your school ~ Talking about things that are / aren‟t in your school II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to identify buildings around their school & describe things that are / aren‟t in their school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Students‟ books are closed. Students look at you. Hold up the picture on page 18. 2. Tells students they are going to play a game where they will write as many as words from the picture as they can. 3. Asks students what they can see in the picture. Writes 2 or 3 on the board. Sets a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Claps the hand at the end on the time & says pen down. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review Warmer/Lead in: (5 mins) Activity 1:

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Close the books.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Writing.

Stop writing. 18

6. Finds out who got the most. Finds who the winner is. Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson C: School around the world – My beautiful school

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 1. Students‟ books are closed. Writes: a/an/some/any and is/isn‟t/are/aren‟t on the board. Asks students to talk to their partner. Can they remember when they are used? 2. Tells students to complete the activity in their notebooks. 3. Students compare. 4. Asks students the answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Controlled Practice

1. Writes: there are some kangaroo. On the board. Do not put period, a Capital letter, or an S. 2. Asks students “what‟s wrong?” 3. Asks students to work with a partner. Tells students they will have 5 mins to write as many sentences about the picture as they can, but they will not get a point if they forgot S, Period, or Capital letter. 4. At the end, clap the hand and tell students to put their pens down. 5. Checks writing. 1. Asks students to look at the picture of Sophal. Can they remember him? 2. Asks students to look at the pictures. What are they? (do not speak in Khmer, the students can use the pictures.) 3. Tells students that they are going to hear about Sophal‟s dream school. 4. Tells students to tick the things there are and cross the things there aren‟t. 5. Asks instruction checking questions. 6. Students listen. 7. Students compare. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 3: (10 mins) Writing

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

Check the winner.

Whole class responds.

Close the books & talk to their partner.

Complete.

Compare answers. Respond.

Look at the board.

Respond. Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any. Writing.

Stop writing.

Check writing.

Look at the pictures.

Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any.

Tick & cross.

Listen to the tape. Compare answers.

8. Checks answers as a class. 1. Asks students to listen again. Is there on or more than one? 2. Students listen. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 5: (5 mins)

1. Tells students to guess what you are drawing. Draw your school. Just do a quick picture. 2. Tells students that they have 5 mins to draw their dream school. 3. Asks students to talk to their partner about their picture.

Activity 6: (6 mins) Brainstorming

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Tells students to show their picture to their partner and tell them about it.

Activity 7: (9 mins) Speaking practice

1. Asks students to look at the “can do” statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the “can do” statements. Tells students do not worry about the ones they don‟t tick.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) I can say the things in my school. I can say the things not in my school.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Gets students to write about their Homework: classroom. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 3 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Respond.

Listen carefully.

Listen again. Respond.

Look at the picture & guess.

Drawing session.

Talk to partner.

Work in groups of 4. Share information of picture.

Listen & look at the “can do” statements. Compare with partner. Respond.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 1: At a new school Unit 3: Why are you so naughty! Lesson A: Why are you so naughty! – What‟s wrong? Pages: 20-21 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Responding to classroom commands. ~ Talking about what you should / shouldn‟t do. ~ Asking questions to clarify basic information. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to respond to their classroom commands & know what they should / shouldn‟t do through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Says: Do you know what naughty means? 2. Holds up the book so that students can see. Tells them that they are going to look at the picture & talk to their group. They have to remember who the kids are & see who is being naughty in each picture. 3. Ask instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Asks students the answers as a class.

Step II: Warmer/Review Activity 1: (5 mins) Warmer/Lead in/Students guess

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Respond.

Listen & look at the pictures carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Work in groups.

Whole class responds. 21

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 1. Tells students they will listen and point to the pictures as they hear about them. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students listen. 1. Tells students to put down their pens and look at you. 2. Tells students they are going to try and remember who should do the things in activity 3. They will write 1,2,3,4 down the side of their notebook and work with a partner. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Students listen & check the answers. 5. Asks students the answers as a class. 1. Tells students to put down their pens & look at you. 2. Tells students to cover the words and see if they can guess what new words the pictures are of in their groups. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Gives students a minute to try & remember. 5. Tells students that they will write a-f in their book and then . try to match the picture and words. 6. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 7. Tells students they will listen to the recording to check their answers. 8. Students listen & check. 9. Students listen again & repeat.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) Lesson A: Why are you so naughty â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Whatâ&#x20AC;&#x;s wrong? Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

Activity 4: (5 mins) New words

Whole class responds.

Listen to the teacher.

Listen carefully to the tape.

Listen & put their pens down.

Do the activity 3.

Listen & check.

Respond.

Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any.

1 min to try & remember.

Match the words & pictures.

Listen & check. Listen & repeat.

1. Tells students to stand up and look at the teacher. 2. Says that you will let them to do the things, but they should do only if you say „Sok says!‟ 3. There are rules: if a student is too slow, they are dead. If students do sth, but you do not say Sok says! , they are dead. If they do not do sth, but you say Sok says!, they are dead.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Practice new words – Sok says!

Stand up Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any.

Whole class starts the game.

Form groups of 4.

Whole class starts the game.

Listen & look at the picture,

Start to tell partner.

1. Tells students to form groups 4 and play the game. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. Make sure that everyone has a turn to at being Sok!

Activity 6: (5 mins) Practice new words – Sok says!

1. Tells students to look at the picture and to tell their partner what they think is happening in the picture. 2. Gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 7: (3 mins) Listening

1. Tells students to compare with partner. Point to the picture and say the sentence. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 min.

Activity 8: (2 mins) Compare

Point & say.

1. Tells students to have everything out of their hands so they can listen well. 2. Tells students to listen & repeat after the recording.

Activity 9: (2 mins) Drill

Prepare before listening.

Listen & repeat.

1. Tells students to work with their group. 2. Tells students to write the group member names on a piece of paper. 3. Tells students to take it in turns to be the teacher and ask “What‟s this” questions. 4. The first student in their group to answer and gets a point. 5. Gives students 5 mins to play the game. Once a minute yell Change Teachers! So everyone has a turn at being the teacher and the student.

Activity 10: (10 mins) Free speaking practice

Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Tells everyone to listen to you. 2. Asks: What‟s this? Questions. Calls on the students for the answers. Asks a few questions like this. 3. Tells students that they have done a great job. Thanks students who spoke consistently in English.

1. Gets students to write what they should do as a good child. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 3 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)

Listen Respond.

Thank to the teacher.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 1: At a new school Unit 3: Why are you so naughty! Lesson B: Why are you so naughty! – What‟s in the bag? Pages: 22-23 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Responding to classroom commands. ~ Talking about what you should / shouldn‟t do. ~ Asking questions to clarify basic information. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to respond to their classroom commands & know what they should / shouldn‟t do through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Tells students to stand up. 2. Tells students that they will play a game to test their spelling. 3. Rules: Tells students the rules. Students who make a mistake must sit down. If a student drops the ball, they must sit down. If a student does a “bad throw” they must sit down. 4. Puts class in two teams (left side vs right side). 5. Says a word and throw the ball to one of your students. (e.g. Pen)

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Spelling ball‟

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Stand up.

Listen & look at the pictures carefully and raise questions if they have any.

6. The student says the first letter of the word (e.g. P) and throws the ball to a classmate on the other team. 7. The student has to say the second letter (e.g. E) and throws throw the ball to the other team.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (48 mins) Lesson B: Why are you so naughty – What‟s in the bag?

1. Asks students if they know what a twin is. If they do not know, tell them. Asks if anyone knows any twins. 2. Tells students to look at the picture. Asks the students if the bags are the same or different. 3. Tells students to work with their partner. Can they name the things in the bags? 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a minute to do this.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Lead in/students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and decide if Din‟s bag is A or B. tells students to read and listen and to follow the text with their finger as they listen. 2. Asks instruction checking questions 3. Students read and listen. 4. Students compare their answers. 5. Asks for answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Whites: Who has an apple? Points to Din‟s bag and asks Does Din has an apple? Students “No”. Writes: No one has an apple. 2. Tells students to answers the questions in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Students compare answers. 5. Asks for answers as a class.

Activity 3: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Start to play the game.

Whole class responds.

Listen to the teacher.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Read & listen. Compare answers. Whole class responds.

Look at the board & respond.

Answer in notebook.

Compare answers. Respond.

1. Tells students that they are going to find the rule. Asks: I have an orange or I has an orange. Tells students to look at the text to help. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Students compare. 4. Asks for answers as a class.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Grammar

1. Tells students to talk to their groups/partners. They do not have to do this in their notebook. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Asks for answers as a class.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Grammar

1. Tells students that they have 4 mins to write sentences about what is in their bag. They must write 5 sentences. 2. Checks writing.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Post Task â&#x20AC;&#x201C; writing

Listen & respond.

Compare answers. Respond.

Talk to partner.

Whole class responds.

Write 5 sentences.

Check writing.

Listen & look at the picture.

Respond.

Listen & check.

Listen & discuss.

Compare. Whole class responds.

1. Tells students to look at the picture. 2. Asks: What is she doing? 3. Listen & check ( answer: playing a game)

Activity 7: (3 mins) Students look at a model of the next activity

1. Asks students to guess the rules of the game. They do not have to write â&#x20AC;&#x201C; only discuss with their partner. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 min. 3. Students compare. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 8: (2 mins)

1. Tells students to listen & repeat.

Activity 9: (1 mins)

Listen & repeat.

1. Tells students they get 1 point for everyone they will find who is the same as them. 2. Asks instruction checking questions about the game. 3. Asks students to play the game. If you have enough room for students to move around, encourages them to ask as many as possible.

Activity 10: (10 mins) Free speaking practice

Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Tells students to sit back down and count their points. 2. Finds out who got the most points in the class. Asks: What do you have in the bag and find out if the student has cheated. (This is supposed to be funny not serious) 3. Tells students that they have done a great job. Thanks students who spoke consistently in English.

1. Gets students to write what they should do as a good student. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 3 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)

Listen carefully.

Count the things in the bag.

Thank to the teacher.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 1: At a new school Unit 3: Why are you so naughty! Lesson C: Why are you so naughty! – Yes, you should! Pages: 24-25 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Responding to classroom commands. ~ Talking about what you should / shouldn‟t do. ~ Asking questions to clarify basic information. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to respond to their classroom commands & know what they should / shouldn‟t do through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Tells them they have to choose 1 person to be the writer. Tells students that they will have a time limit to think of as many things as they can that they have in common. 3. Writes an example on the board. (e.g. we live in Phnom Penh.). 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives the groups a 3 mins limit 5. At the end of three mins, clap your hand and tells them to put

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer/Lead in

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Work in groups of 4.

Stop writing. 29

their pens down. 6. Who has the most sentences?

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) Lesson C: Why are you so naughty – Yes, you should!

1. Tells students to cover the text in their textbooks. 2. Tells students to look at the picture. 3. Have students shout out their guesses. Do not say if the guesses are right or wrong. 4. Asks students to guess Who is s good student? 5. Make sure that students know who is supposed to be the “naughty” student. 6. Asks how they think the boys know each other. (They are twins.)

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that one of the twins is called Dy and that they will read and listen to find out who Dy is. Says Is Dy the good student or naughty student? 2. Students listen and read. 3. Students compare their guesses. 4. Asks for answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read/listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to close the books. Eyes on you. 2. Writes: Is Din naughty? On the board. Asks students: Is Din naughty? Students: No! Try and make them say the full sentence. 3. Tells students to continue writing full sentences in their notebooks 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. Students compare their answers.

Activity 3: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

1. Tells students to look at the picture and talk to their group. 2. Tells them to try and guess who Dy is in the pictures, and who Din is. (Dy‟s twin) Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

. Activity 4: (5 mins) Preparing to write

Check writing.

Whole class responds.

Listen & cover the books.

Look at the picture.

Guess & say.

Respond.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Read & listen. Compare answers. Whole class responds.

Close the books.

Look at the board & answer.

Write in notebook.

Compare answers.

Look at the picture & talk.

Look & guess.

3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Asks answers as a class. 5. Tells students to talk to about what they think the teacher might say in each picture. 6. Do the first one together. “Sit down”. 7. Asks for answers as a class. 1. Asks students what Din‟s twin should do in picture 1. 2. Writes: He should on the board. Students yell sit down. 3. Writes: He should sit down on the board. 4. Tells students to write the rest of the sentences in their notebooks. Tells students there are many possible answers. 5. Students compare. 6. Asks for answers as a class.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Writing

1. Have students look at your bag. Asks what do I have in my bag? Students yell ideas (e.g. a pen) 2. Make students say the full questions, and write it on the board. Do you have a pen? 3. Tells students that they will play a game. They will play with partners: One partner is students A, and another one is student B. 4. Asks student A to raise their hand 5. Asks student B to raise their hand. 6. Tells students that they will both have pictures. The pictures are different. They will have to ask “Do you have…” questions to try and find out everything in their friend‟s bag. 7. Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 5 mins. 8. Tells student A to turn to page 230. 9. Tells students B to turn to page 237. 10. Have students play the game.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Speaking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Respond.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture. Respond.

Write in notebooks.

Compare answers. Whole class responds.

Look and answer.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any

Raise the hand.

Turn to page 230.

Turn to page 237.

Play the game. 31

11. Tells students who finish early to write the 5 winning questions in their notebooks. 1. Asks students to look at the “can do” statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Gets students to write what they should do as a good friend. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 4 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Write the 5 winning questions.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare statements.

Respond to the teacher.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) I can say what people should do and shouldn‟t do in class. I can ask questions with “Do you have”. I can say what I have. I can do what the teacher says in class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 2: Good students Unit 4: I study English! Lesson A: I study English! – What time do you have class? Pages: 26-27 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about which classes you‟re taking and when. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able talk about which classes they‟re taking and when through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Reviews the days of the week. 2. Pre-teach the words loud, quiet and whisper. 3. Introduces hand signs to match the words (e.g. loud – cup hands around mouth, quiet – place finger against lips, whisper – put hands behind ears). 4. Use body language to signal whether students should say the days of the week loudly, quietly, or by whispering.

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Activity 1: Play „Say it differently‟

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Review the days of the week. Learn words. Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson A: I study English! â&#x20AC;&#x201C; What time do you have class?

Whole class responds.

Respond. Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Speaking.

Listen & check. Listen & repeat.

Close the books.

Listen to Dara.

Respond.

Listen & complete the table.

Write in notebook.

Notebook.

Check answers.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen and repeat

Listen & repeat.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Freer practice

Listen carefully.

Timetable.

1. Asks students what subjects they study at school. 2. In pairs, tells them to look at the photos in activity 2 and identify which subjects the photos represent. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. - Are you speaking or writing? 4. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Tells students to listen and check. 6. Tells students to listen and repeat.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Lead in and Students guess

1. Tells students to close their books. 2. Tells students that they are going to listen to Dara talking about his classes at school. 3. Asks Are they the same as yours? 4. Asks some ideas from the class.

Activity 3: (3 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to listen again and complete the table. 2. Tells students to write answers in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions - Do you write your answers in notebooks or books? 4. Give a time limit of 6 mins. 5. Check answers as a class.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

1. Gets students to listen and repeat.

1. Tells students to make their own timetables in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. - Are you writing about your friend or your timetable? 3. Gives a time limit of 8 mins. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Pus students in pairs. 2. Tells them to ask and answer about their own timetable with their partners. 3. Gives a time limit of 5 mins.

1. Asks some questions from today‟s lesson. 2. Listens to students‟ answers.

1. Gets students to write why they study English. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 4 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Activity 6: (8 mins) Speaking

Work in pairs. Ask & answer questions.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) What time do you study maths? What time do you study Geography? What time do you study Physics?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 2: Good students Unit 4: I study English! Lesson B: I study English! – What time do you have class? Pages: 28-29 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about which classes you‟re taking and when. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able talk about which classes they‟re taking and when through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Play „Month chant‟ To focus on reviewing the months of the year

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Gives instructions: Puts students into groups. Each group chooses a month. Each group takes it in turns to say the chant (e.g. J for January, J for January, J for January to S for September, S for September, S for September, S for September, September to D for December, etc.).

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________ Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any. Whole class plays the game.

. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 1. Draws a clock on the board (e.g. 7.00, 8.30, 10.00). 2. Asks students the times. 3. Says the times (o‟clock and half past only). 4. Calls some volunteers to draw the times you say on the board. 5. Shows the clock in Activity 1. 6. Asks: which side do we use quarter past? Which side do we use quarter to? 7. Draws the first clock together as a class (e.g. 9.45). 8. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins. 9. Asks students to work in pairs to draw the rest of the clocks. 10. Checks answers as a class.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (45 mins) Lesson B: I study English! – What time do you have class?

Activity 1: (10 mins) Review

1. Shows students the photo of Jacky in activity 2. 2. Asks about Jacky (e.g. what‟s her name? How old is she? Where is she from? 3. Have a class vote. (e.g. How many students think she is 14 years old?)

Activity 2: (4 mins) Lead in and students guess

1. Tells students to match the words with the photos. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) New words

1. Says: This is Jacky. Now read about her. Do you like to study in the same way as Jacky? Tests students to read quickly for the answer. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Students compare their answers with their partners. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students read for the big ideas

Whole class responds.

Look at the board.

Respond.

Draw the clock.

Respond.

Draw the rest of the clocks.

Check answers.

Look at the photo

Respond.

Match the words with the photos.

Check answers.

Read carefully.

Compare answers.

4. Asks some ideas from the class. 1. Tells students to read the text again and put a tick or cross next to the sentences. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students read for the answers

1. Points to Marshyâ&#x20AC;&#x;s photo in activity 5. 2. Tells students Marshy is not from Earth. Asks questions (e.g. Is Marshy from Cambodia? Is he from Australia? Is he from the USA? ) 3. Points to the photo of the solar system and asks students where we are (Earth). Picks a strong student to do this. 4. Says that Marshy is from one of the planets moving around the sun. Can they guess? Points to the planet Mars. 5. Tells students to write about Marshy using the timetable. Do the first answer together as a class. 6. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit f 5 mins. 7. Students compare their answers with their partners. 8. Asks and answers the questions as a class.

Activity 5: (8 mins) Writing

1. Tells students they will play a game in pairs. One is the writer and one is the speaker. 2. Tells students to draw a table in their notebooks. 3. The speaker reads words found in activity 6. The writer writes the words into his/her notebooks under the correct headings. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. After 3 mins, students swap roles. 6. Students compare notes.

Activity 6: (8 mins) Speaking and listening-categorising

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Respond.

Read the text again.

Check answers.

Look at the photo.

Listen & respond.

Respond.

Guess & respond.

Write about Marshy.

Compare answers.

Ask & answer.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Draw a table.

Do the activity.

Swap the roles.

Compare notes. 38

1. Asks some students to talk about the results of their game. 2. Listens for pronunciation. 3. Tells students they have done a great job. Thanks students who worked well in groups and helped their friends.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) What time do you study maths? What time do you study Geography? What time do you study Physics?

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Gets students to write about their Homework: favourite months of the year. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 4 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Talk about the results of the game. Pronoun the words. Thank to the teacher.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 2: Good students Unit 4: I study English! Lesson C: I study English! – I love Sundays! Pages: 30-31 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about which classes you‟re taking and when. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about which classes they‟re taking and when through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Gives instructions: - The teacher whispers a word to a student on the first row. - The student in turn, whispers to the next student, until the last student at the end of the row. - The last student either shouts the word or writes it on the board.

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Play „Whispers‟

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Whole class plays the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson C: I study English! â&#x20AC;&#x201C; I love Sundays!

1. Tells students to order the days of the week in their notebook. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 3. Students compare with their groups/partner. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 1: (6 mins) Review

1. Points to the picture of the world. Asks: What subject is this? 2. Tells students to write the subjects in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 4. Students compare with their groups/partner. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (6 mins) Review

1. Gets students to listen and match.

Activity 3: (7 mins) Students listen and match

1. Asks: What did Avorng say? Students: I play with my egg everyday! 2. Puts students in pairs. 3. Tells students to take it in turns to remember what each of the character said. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Speaking

1. Students work in pairs. Student A turn to page 230. Students B turn to page 237. 2. They take it in turns to say the times and draw clocks to show the times. 3. Gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 5: (12 mins) Speaking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Order the days of the week.

Compare answers.

Check answers.

Look & respond.

Write in notebook.

Compare answers.

Check answers.

Listen & match.

Respond.

Work in pairs. Take in turns.

Check answers.

Work in pairs.

Take turns.

1. Asks students to look at the “can do” statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the “can do” statements.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) I can tell the time. I can say some of my subjects. I can say what time I study. I can say the days of the week.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Gets students to write about their Homework: favourite subjects. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 5 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with friends.

Show the feeling.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 2: Good students Unit 5: I study English! Lesson A: Study habits – I love school! Pages: 32-33 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your study habits and how often you do them. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their study habits and how often they do them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Writes „Japan‟ on the board. 2. Tells students to talk about what they know about Japan. 3. Asks some students what they spoke about.

Step II: Warmer/Review (2 mins) Warmer/Lead in

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 1. Gives instructions: - Tells students to look at the picture of Hiroko. - Asks „Where is she from?‟ Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (44 mins) Lesson A: Study habits – I love school!

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Look at the board. Talk about Japan.

Respond.

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Japan. 43

Asks where she is. Tells students to write their guess about what Hiroko loves.

1. Tells students to listen. What does Hiroko love? 2. Asks instruction checking questions 3. Tells students to listen. 4. Tells students to compare with their partners. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Gives instructions: - Tells students to look at activity 3. - Tells students that they are going to talk to their partner. - Asks students to match the sentence halves. - Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 3 mins. - Tells students to write numbers 1-8 in their notebooks. - Asks students to listen and write the letter next to the number. - Students compare their answers. - Asks answers from the class.

Activity 3: (3 mins) Students guess the answers

1. Tells students to look at the pictures. Tells them to cover the text and talk to their partners. 2. Do they know the words? 3. Tells students to talk to their partners and point to the pictures and words. Gives them 2 mins to do this. Do not translate for the students. 4. Tells students to listen and check. 5. Tells students to listen and repeat.

Activity 4: (5 mins) New words

1. Asks students to cover the exercise 6 and to look at the picture. 2. Says: Can you remember this girl? What can you remember? 3. Tells students to talk to their partners. 4. Give a time limit of 1 min.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Students guess

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

School.

Listen carefully.

Listen to the tape. Compare answers.

Check answers.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Talk to partner.

Matching.

Listen to the tape.

Compare answers.

Respond.

Look at the pictures & cover the text.

Talk to partner.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Cover the exercise 6 and look at the picture.

Respond.

Talk to partner.

1. Says: Letâ&#x20AC;&#x;s read! Tells students to read with the teacher. 2. Asks students How old is Bopha? Letâ&#x20AC;&#x;s guess! 3. Tells students to talk with their partners and try to use the pictures to complete the passage about Bopha. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Tells students to listen and compare.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Controlled practice

1. Tells students that they are going to write about themselves, but first they will take notes. 2. Asks students to write in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 7: (5 mins) Taking notes

1. Tells students to use their notes to write a piece about them similar to activity 7. 2. Tells students that they need to keep their writing secret for the next activity and not to write their name. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins. 1. Tells students that make sure they do not have their names on their papers. 2. Collect all the papers. 3. Asks students to come up to you and collect a paper, but if it is their own they should put it back. 4. Tells students to find the owner of their paper by asking questions from the note taking stage.

1. Asks people whose paper they had, and how they found them.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Read

Respond.

Talk with partner.

Listen & compare.

Listen carefully.

Write in notebook.

Activity 8: (10 mins) Writing

Listen carefully & raise questions if they have any.

Activity 9: (5 mins) Speaking

No writing the name on the paper.

Respond.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)

1. Gets students to write about the activities they usually do after getting up in the morning. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 5 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 2: Good students Unit 5: I study English! Lesson B: Study habits – Are you a good student? Pages: 34-35 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your study habits and how often you do them. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their study habits and how often they do them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Tells students to stand up. Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Tells students that they are going Warmer: to play a game to test their ABC ball spelling. To focus on students‟ spelling. - Put class in two teams – left side of the room vs right side of the room. Have students move to their side of the room (left or right) as much as you can (with a smaller class), you can do this at the front on the room in front of the whiteboard. - Students who make a mistake must sit down. If a student drops the ball, they must sit down. If a Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

student does a bad throw, they must sit down. Says a word and throw the ball to one of your students. (e.g. Pen!) The student says the first letter of the word (e.g. P) and throws the ball to a classmate on the other team. The student has to say the second letter (e.g. E) and throw the ball to the other team. Rules: students who make a mistake must sit down. If a student drops the ball, they must sit down. If a student does a bad throw they must sit down.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (39 mins) Lesson B: Study habits â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Are you a good student?

2. Gives instructions: - Tells students to cover the text in their books. - Tells students look at the picture. - Asks students if they can remember the boysâ&#x20AC;&#x; names. - Asks students to guess: Who is a good student? Who is naughty?

Activity 1: (2 mins) Lead in/Students guess

1. Tells students they are going to read and listen and decide which is Dara and which is Sophal. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students read and listen. 4. Students compare their guesses. 5. Asks for answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read/listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to look at the table. Says who does homework none of the time? (Dara) asks students how they know. 2. Have students point to the sentence in the text. 3. Tells students to draw the table quickly in their books and fill the rest of the table. Gives 5 mins for this. 4. Asks instruction checking

Activity 3: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class plays the game.

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Respond.

Listen carefully.

Read & listen. Compare answers. Check answers.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

questions. 5. Have students complete. 6. Students compare their answers. 7. Asks for answers as a class.

1. Asks students to look at the picture and talk to the group. Tells them not to write. 2. Students compare their answers. 3. Asks for answers as a class. (none of the time=never; some of the time=sometimes; all of the time=always)

Activity 4: (2 mins) Grammar

1. Asks students to look at picture. Says where is Bopha? Where is Sreymao? 2. Tells students they are going to listen and find out if Sreymao is a good student. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Tells students to listen and check. 5. Tells students to compare their answers. 6. Asks for the answer as a class.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Listening (model of the speaking activity)

1. Tells students that they are going to interview each other, just like Bopha did with Sreymao. 2. Puts students into partners. 3. Tells students to keep a score as their partners answer the questions. Points to the scores in the book. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Have students interview each other. 6. Have students add up each otherâ&#x20AC;&#x;s scores. 7. Have students read each other the results at the back of the book. 8. Make sure any students who got You are lazy understand that the quiz is funny and it doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x;t really mean that they are lazy.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Speaking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Complete the table. Compare answers. Respond.

Look at the pictures & talk to the group.

Compare answers.

Respond.

Look at the picture.

Listen & check.

Respond.

Listen carefully.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

1. Asks the students what their partners got in the quiz. 2. Asks students why. 3. Make sure students see this as funny and do not feel bad about the results.

1. Gets students to write about how to be a good person/citizen. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 5 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins)

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 2: Good students Unit 5: I study English! Lesson C: Study habits – Is that right? Pages: 36-37 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your study habits and how often you do them. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their study habits and how often they do them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Writes true and false on the board. 2. Asks students if they know what the words mean. (if they don‟t know, gives extra clues! Adds truth/lie; right/wrong/ and tick & cross). 3. Asks What do students lie about? 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Compare ideas as a class.

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer/Lead in

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Look at the board.

Guess.

Respond.

Compare ideas.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson C: Study habits – Is that right or wrong?

1. Gives instructions: - Tells students to look at the picture of Mom. Asks Who she is. - Asks Does she like her job? - Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 1 min. - Students write their guesses in their notebooks.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Tells students to compare answers with their pairs. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Listen and check

1. Gives instructions: - Tells students to write the letters a-f in their notebooks. - Checks that students know the difference between a tick and a cross. - Tells students to read the questions with their partners and see if they can remember/guess the answers. Tells students to put a tick for “yes, that‟s right”, and a cross for “No, that‟s not right”. - Tells students they are going to listen and check and the answers in their notebooks. - Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. - Students compare their answers with their group/partner.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students Miss Mom played a trick and said one thing that is false! 2. Asks students to look at the tape, can they guess the thing that is false? 3. Model the activity. Writes: My name is Mom. Asks True or False? Students: True.

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Compare guesses.

Listen carefully.

Compare answers.

Check answers.

Listen carefully. Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Read the questions.

Listen & check.

Compare answers.

Listen carefully.

4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students compare their answers with partner. 6. Asks students the answers as a class. 7. Asks students to listen and check. 1. Tells students to look at the picture of Dara, Bopha and Sophal. 2. Asks them who they think says the most false things. 3. Gets some ideas from students but do not say who is right and wrong. 4. Tells students that they are going to check their guesses. 5. Look at Daraâ&#x20AC;&#x;s list together I always do my homework. asks students if this is true or false. Students: false! 6. Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 5 mins. 7. Tells students to compare their answers. 8. Asks answers from the class.

Activity 4: (2 mins) True/False

1. Write one thing that is true about you and one thing that is a lie about you. 2. Tells students they are going to write 3 sentences that are true about them and 2 sentences which are lies about them. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Writing

1. Tells students that you are going to find out who is a good liar in their group. 2. Puts students in groups of 4. 3. Tells students to take it in turns to read their sentences. 4. Asks instructions checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. The rest of the group guesses.

Activity 6: (7 mins) Speaking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Compare answers.

Respond.

Listen & check.

Listen carefully.

Check answers.

Compare answers.

Respond.

Listen carefully.

Write 3 sentences that are true and 2 sentences that are lies.

Listen carefully.

Work in groups of 4. Take turns to read.

The others guess. 53

1. Asks students to look at the “can do” statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Gets students to write about how they study maths. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 6 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins)

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner.

Show about their feeling.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

I can talk about my studies. I can say how often I do things.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 2: Good students Unit 6: Talking with teachers Lesson A: Talking with teacher – Can we have a party? Pages: 38-39 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Asking permission and making simple requests. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask for permission and make simple requests through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Tells students that they will hear sentence. Can they be the first to guess if they are true or false? 2. Rules: - Students are not allowed to talk. - If they think the answer is true clap their hands. - If they think it is false, students stomp their feet. 3. Says a few sentences to students and see who does the action correctly. (e.g. There is a table in the classroom. Students: Clap! Clap! There is a kangaroo in the classroom. Students: stomp! Stomp!).

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Play “Active true or false”

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

4. Have some students “be the teacher” and ask the questions of the class.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson A: Talking with teachers – Can we have a party?

1. Shows students the photo in the book. 2. Asks: What are the people doing?

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in

1. Shows a picture of Linda, Bopha‟s friend. 2. Tells students to guess where she is from. 3. Tells students to talk with their partners and share ideas. 4. Then shows a picture of Linda and UK. If there is a map in the classroom, use the map to show where Linda is from.

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students guess

1. Says: Bopha wants to have a party at school? Can she have a party at school? 2. Tells students to close the books. 3. Asks instruction checking questions 4. Tells student to listen and check.

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to listen and put a tick or a cross next to the sentences 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mis. 3. Students listen and check. 4. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 4: (2 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to listen & repeat. 1. Gives instructions: - Tells students to work in groups of 3. - Students take it in turns to make requests using the pictures as prompts. The other students have to guess which picture the Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen & repeat Activity 5: (10 mins) Guessing game

Whole class plays the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the photo.

Respond.

Look at the picture.

Guess.

Talk and share ideas with partners.

Look at the photo/map.

Guess & respond.

Close the books.

Listen & check.

Listen carefully.

Listen & check. Asks & answer the questions.

Listen & repeat.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

speaker is talking about. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

1. Tells students to ask the teacher things they want to do at school, using “May I …” “Can I …” 2. Asks some students speak on behalf of other students, using “May we…?” “Can she…?”

Activity 6: (4 mins) Speaking

1. Gives instructions: - Puts students into group of 5/6. - Tells one student in each group they are Mr. Sovann. - Students in groups take it in turns to ask Mr. Sovann using „Can I, May I, Can he, May we‟. - Tells students to make silly requests. (e.g. can we study in your office? Can we camp at school? Can my dog study with me? - Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 7: (9 mins) Roleplay

1. Asks some students what they asked Mr. Sovann. 2. Listens to students answer. (Pronunciation )

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Gets students to write about your Homework: Teacher of English. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 6 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Work in groups of 3.

Listen carefully.

Start speaking.

Listen carefully. Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Start the roleplay.

Listen carefully.

Respond.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 2: Good students Unit 6: Talking with teachers Lesson B: Talking with teacher – Water festival fun Pages: 40-41 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Asking permission and making simple requests. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask for permission and make simple requests through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Rules: - Students are not allowed to talk. - If they think the answers is true, students meow like a cat. - If it is false, students bark like a dog. 2. Says a few sentences and see who does the action correctly. 3. Have some students “be the teacher” and asks questions of the class. 4. Have students come and take it in turns to be the teacher.

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Play “Active true or false”

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Whole class plays the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) Lesson B: Talking with teachers â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Water festival fun

1. Shows some water festival photos from activity 1. 2. Asks: What can you see? What are they doing? 3. Students guess which festival it is in pairs. 4. Asks some students to tell the class what their guesses are.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Students match the words with the photos. 2. Students listen and repeat.

Activity 2: (5 mins) New words

1. Students read quickly to answer this question. Who is Bopha going out with? (Dara, Sophal and Avorng) 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Students compare with their partner/group. 4. Asks and answers as a class.

Activity 3: (3 mins) Students read for the big idea

1. Tells students to name the characters that said the sentences. 2. Students write their answers in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Students compare with partner/group. 5. Asks and answers as a class.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students read for the answers

1. Tells students to pretend that they are going to go to water festival. Tells students to talk to their partner/group about what they want to see at Water Festival. 2. Tells students that they are going to make a list of sentences for their mums. Tells students to add their own ideas to their lists. 3. Asks instruction checking

Activity 5: (10 mins) Writing

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Look at the photo.

Respond.

Guess in pairs.

Tell their guesses.

Match the words with the photos. Listen & repeat.

Read quickly.

Compare answers.

Ask & answer as a class.

Name the characters.

Write in notebooks.

Compare answers.

Ask & answer as a class.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Listen carefully.

questions and give a time limit of 8 mins. 1. Students practice asking requests with their partners. 2. Students use their ideas from activity 5.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Roleplay

1. Puts students in group of 4/5. 2. Students take turns to make sentences using the pictures as prompts. 3. Other students in the group guess which picture the speaker is talking about. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 7: (10 mins) Guessing game

1. Asks students to talk about their group work. Asks for some sentences they used to play the game. 2. Are students confident about using the language? How is their pronunciation?

1. Gets students to write about Water Festival. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 6 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Practice asking requests.

Use ideas from activity 5.

Work in group of 4/5. Take turns to make sentences.

Others guess.

Talk about group work activity.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 2: Good students Unit 6: Talking with teachers Lesson C: Talking with teacher – Can I do everything? Pages: 42-43 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Asking permission and making simple requests. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask for permission and make simple requests through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Gives instructions: - Put students into groups of 4/5. Asks students what their team name is. - The teacher says „I hear with my little ear‟ something beginning with /s/ (sound). - In groups students think of a word that begin with /s/. - The first group to yell out something beginning with /s/ gets a point for their team. - Continue with a different letter / sound.

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Play “I hear with my little ear”

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Whole class plays the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson C: Talking with teachers – Can I do everything?

1. Asks students what they think the characters are asking. 2. Lets them guess and talk to their partners. Gives a time limit of 1 min. 3. Students listen and tick.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students to write what the characters said using the picture prompts. 2. Tells students to write the responses for the requests. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Gives a time limit of 8 mins. 1. Tells students to work in pairs. 2. First, lets each students write any more ideas they have in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins. 4. Tells students to ask and answer the questions using the pictures as prompts and their own ideas. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Writing

Activity 3: (15 mins) Writing and speaking

1. Points to activity 4. 2. Shows students the 2 photos. 3. Tells students to work with a different partner from the one in activity 3. 4. In pairs, students ask and answer questions. 5. Students put a tick on what they can / may do, based on their classmate‟s response.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Speaking

1. Asks students to look at the „can do‟ statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) I can use „May I, May we‟ when asking questions. I can use „Can I, Can we‟ when asking questions.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Answer.

Talk to partners.

Listen & tick.

Write what the characters said.

Write the responses for the requests.

Work in pairs. Prepare any ideas in notebooks.

Ask & answer the questions.

Look at activity 4. Look at the photos. Work with a different partner.

Ask & answer questions.

Put a tick on what they can / may do.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner.

Show their feelings.

1. Gets students to write about what they can do to help their parents. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 7 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 3: A school day Unit 7: Getting ready for school Lesson A: Getting ready for school – The things we do for school Pages: 44-45 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your daily routines and things that you do in preparation for school. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their daily routines and what they prepare for school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Gives instructions: - Writes ordinal numbers firsttenth on small pieces of paper before class. - Puts students in groups of 10. - Tells students they are going to play a game called „Line Up!‟. Students put themselves in a line from first to tenth. Tells students that they should not read each other‟s pieces of paper. They should say what is written there (Do not show the paper!) - Asks instruction checking questions. - Calls each group in front of the

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: Play “Line Up!”

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

class near the whiteboard. Hands each student a piece of paper The team that gets in line in the correct order the fastest is the winner!

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson A: Getting ready for school â&#x20AC;&#x201C; The things we do for school

1. Tells students to match the pictures words with their partner/group. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Students compare with their partner/group. 4. Students listen, check and repeat.

Activity 1: (8 mins) New words

1. Tells students to work with their groups or in pairs. Tells students to talk about what they do every day. 2. Asks: Which picture do you do every day? Which picture do you do sometimes? What do you do every day that is not in the picture? 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students they are going to listen to Bopha and Dara and decide which of the two characters they are most like (similar to). 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students talk to their group/partner and say why they chose Bopha or Dara. 4. Come together as a class. Take a vote! (put your hand up if youâ&#x20AC;&#x;re like Dara!)

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class plays the game.

Whole class responds.

Match the pictures with words.

Compare answers.

Listen, check and repeat.

Work in groups/in pairs. N

Answers the questions.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Talk to their group/partner.

Take a vote!

1. Students listen again and tick. 2. Students listen and repeat.

Activity 3: (10 mins) Students listen for the answers

Listen & tick. Listen & repeat.

1. Puts students into small groups. 2. Tells students to talk about what they do every day in their small groups. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Speaking

Work in groups. Talk about what they do every day.

1. In groups, students guess what Avorng does every day. 2. Gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 5: (7 mins) Speaking

Guess what Avorn does every day.

Tell the class what they guessed.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

1. Asks some students to tell the class their guesses.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Gets students to write about their Homework: daily routines. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 7 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 3: A school day Unit 7: Getting ready for school Lesson B: Getting ready for school – A cold cool school Pages: 46-47 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your daily routines and things that you do in preparation for school. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their daily routines and what they prepare for school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Gives instructions: - Puts students into groups of 4/5. - Says: pencil, pencil, pencil, pencil, pen, pencil. - Asks: which is different? Is the first different? Is the second different? Is the fourth different? - Tells students to listen and say which time was different. Encourage them to use ordinal numbers.

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: Game! Which time?

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Whole class plays the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (45 mins) Lesson B: Getting ready for school – A cold cool school

1. Shows photos of Canada. Lets students guess what country will learn about today. 2. Gives students hints as needed (e.g. This country starts with letter C. It‟s usually cold). 3. Tells students to talk about what they know about this country.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Asks students what they do every day? 2. Tells students to read the text quickly to find out. 3. Asks: Do you do the same things as Bonny? Do you do anything different? 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students compare their answers with their partner/group.

Activity 2: (7 mins) Students read for the big idea

1. Tells students to read again and complete the table in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Students compare their answers with their partner/group. 4. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 3: (7 mins) Students read for the answers

1. Tells students that they are going to compare their daily routines with Bonny‟s. 2. Tells students to complete their own tables. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 10 mins.

Activity 4: (14 mins) Writing

1. Puts students into groups of 5/6. 2. Students play a guessing game in pairs or groups. 3. Tells students to take turns to say the times they‟ve written in

Activity 5: (10 mins) Guessing game

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Look at the photos.

Guess.

Talk about Canada.

Respond.

Read the text quickly.

Respond.

Compare answers.

Read again & complete.

Compare answers.

Ask & answer questions.

Compare their daily routines with Bonny‟s.

Complete their own tables.

Work in groups of 5/6. Play a guessing game.

Take turns to say the times. 68

their notebooks. 4. Other students guess she/he does at that time. Students get 1 point for each correct guess. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

1. Asks some students to tell the class about their timetables.

1. Gets students to write about timetables for study at home. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 7 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Others guess.

Tell the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 3: A school day Unit 7: Getting ready for school Lesson C: Getting ready for school – Great days Pages: 48-49 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your daily routines and things that you do in preparation for school. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their daily routines and what they prepare for school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today? 4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Gives instructions: - Puts students into 2 teams. - Chooses a strong student from each team to be the „actor‟. - The actors take it in turns to mime words/phrases that the teacher tells them (e.g. sit down, notebook, etc…) - Their team must guess the word. - Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Game! Charades

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Whole class plays the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (34 mins) Lesson C: Getting ready for school – Great days

1. Tells students to order the ordinal numbers in exercise one. Then they write the full forms in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 1: (7 mins) Review

1. This is a counting game. Students need to count up the numbers quickly. 2. In groups, students take turns counting up one number at a time, but for any multiple of 4, they say „buzz‟. (e.g. 1, 2, 3, buzz…). Change to multiple of 3, 5…) 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Buzz! Stirrer (5 mins)

1. Tells students to listen to Bopha and order the pictures using ordinal numbers.

Whole class responds.

Order the ordinal numbers.

Check answers.

Listen carefully.

Whole class plays the game.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

Listen to the tape.

1. Tells students to write about Avorng. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins. 3. Students compare their writing with their partners. 4. Have some students read their work out for the class.

Activity 3: (10 mins) Writing

Write about Avorng.

Compare writing.

Read for the class.

1. Tells students to stand up and look at the teacher. 2. Says that you will let them to do things but they should only do if you say Sok says! 3. There are rules. If a student is too slow to they are out. If students do something, but you didn‟t say Sok says, they are out.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Play Sok says!

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

4. If they don‟t do something, but you did say Sok says they are out. 1. Asks students to look at the „can do‟ statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statement.

1. Gets students to write about the day you like most and why. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 8 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Whole class plays the game.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner.

Show the class their feelings.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 3: A school day Unit 8: Going to school Lesson A: Going to school – Do you know what he does? Pages: 50-51 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about how you and your friends get to school. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about how they and their friends get to school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 1. Asks students to look at the picture. Asks what they can remember about Sophal and Linda. Tells students to talk to their partners for a minute. 2. Asks for some answers as a class. 3. Asks students why they think Sophal is talking to Linda. Tells students to talk to their partner Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (48 mins) Lesson A: Going to school – Do you know what he does?

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in/students guess

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture & talk to their partners.

Respond.

Talk to their partners.

for a minute. 4. Asks for some answers as a class. 1. Students listen and check. 2. Students compare. 3. Asks for some answers as a class.

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to try and remember/guess what Sophal said. Gives a 3 mins limit. 3. Tells students to write 1-11in their notebooks and write S for Sophal, D for Dara and L for Linda. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Students listen and compare. 6. Asks for answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Respond.

Listen & Check. Compare answers. Respond.

Work in pairs.

Guess what Sophal said.

Write 1-11 and write S=Sophal, D=Dara, L=Linda in notebooks.

Listen & compare. Respond.

Possible answers: Sophal is flirting with Linda. Sophal wants Linda to think he is good/cool. Sophal wants Linda to think that he is better than Dara.

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to look at the grammar box. 2. Tells students that they are going to read, listen and guess what happens to the word brush in the words. 3. Asks students to complete the grammar rules by looking at the examples sentences. 4. Students compare.

Activity 4: (3 mins) Grammar pronunciation presentation -

1. Tells students that there are 3 different ways to say the endingâ&#x20AC;&#x17E;sâ&#x20AC;&#x; noise in English. 2. Tells students to listen. 3. Tells students to listen again and repeat. 1. Tells students that you are going to play a game to find out who the best listeners are. 2. Tells students to close their books, writes: S, Z, IZ on the board. Drills the sounds. 3. Tells students to wave their hands in the air if they hear a /s/

Activity 5: (5 mins) Grammar pronunciation presentation

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Game! Pronunciation controlled practice (7 mins)

Look at the grammar box. Read, listen & guess.

Complete the grammar rules.

Compare. Listen carefully.

Listen. Listen again & repeat.

Listen carefully.

Sleeps / showers / brushes / pens / notebooks / gets / watches / goes / borrows / cleans / eggs / classmates / kangaroos / libraries / bathrooms / footballs /

Whole class plays the game. 74

word, touch their nose if they hear an /IZ/ word, and shake their partners hand if they hear a /Z/ words. 1. Tells students to write a-k in their notebooks. 2. Tells students to look at the pictures in their textbooks and tick the things they do and cross the things they do not do. 3. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. 1. Tells students to tell their partner about them using the pictures.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Speaking – preparing to speak

Activity 7: (5 mins) Speaking – free practice

1. Tells students to draw 2 columns down the side of the page next to the letters. 2. Tells students they will have 5 mins to find one person that does and one person that doesn‟t for each of the activities. They do not have to write sentences, just names. 3. Gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Students talk to their partners using and + but.

Activity 8: (10 mins) Speaking – free practice

1. Asks individual students about what they found during the race. 2. Listens for /S/ /Z/ /IZ/ and congratulates students who do this correctly.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)

1. Tells students to write 5 sentences. Use and + but. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 8 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework: (Optional )

Write a-k in notebooks.

Tick things they do and cross things they don‟t do.

Tells their partner about them.

Listen carefully.

Draw 2 columns.

Talk to partners using and + but.

Respond.

Practice with pronunciations.

Listen and take note of the homework.

Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Reminders:

Goodbye!

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 3: A school day Unit 8: Going to school Lesson B: Going to school – Liar Liar Pages: 52-53 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about how you and your friends get to school. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about how they and their friends get to school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 1. Asks students how they get to school. 2. Tells students to open their book, but to cover the text. 3. Tells students to look at the cartoon. Asks how does Dara get to school? 4. Tells students to work with their partner and describe but not read the text. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (48 mins) Lesson B: Going to school – Liar Liar

Activity 1: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Whole class responds.

Respond.

Open the book, but to cover the text.

Look at the cartoon and answer.

Work with partner to describe the cartoon. 76

5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 6. Com back together as a class. Gets 2 or 3 ideas from students. 1. Tells students that they are going to read and listen. They are reading to see if what Dara says and what is in the cartoon is the same or different. Is Dara a liar? 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. This helps students with dyslexia and also helps you check no one is lost. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Fingers Ready? Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students to compare their answer with their group/partner. 6. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read/listen for the big idea

1. Writes Does he get up early? On the board. 2. Tells students that they are going to answer questions about what Dara says and Not the cartoon. 3. Asks Does Dara say he gets up early? Students answer Yes. Have students point to the part of text where they found the answer. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. Students complete. 6. Students compare with their group/partner. 7. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

1. Asks students if they lie? What about? 2. Students discuss with their partner. 3. Asks for some answers as a class. (This is supposed to be funny and silly!)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 4: (2 mins) Post task

Share ideas.

Listen carefully to respond to the question: Is Dara a liar?

Listen & read along with fingers.

Compare answer.

Check answer.

Look at the board.

Listen carefully and to answer about what Dara says.

Respond.

Complete. Compare answers. Check answers.

Respond.

Discuss with partner.

Respond.

1. Writes: use ‘do’ with ‘I, you, we, they’. 2. Points to the example box. Asks Truth or Lie? Students: Truth. 3. Draw a tick next to Use do with I you we they. 4. Tells students to write numbers 1-12 in their notebooks and tick for truths cross for lies. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 6. Students compare. 7. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Grammar

1. Puts students into groups of 4. Asks them to decide on one student to be the writer. 2. Tells students to look at the picture. Tells students that Sophal wants to find out more about Bopha‟s friend Linda. 3. Says What does Sophal ask Bopha? Students: Does she like birds? 4. Asks students what other questions Sophal might like to ask a new classmate. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 6 and 7: (10 mins) Writing

1. Models the activity with one of the students. Asks them to think of a student but not to tell you (teacher) who it is. 2. Asks: Is it a girl? Does she like English? Etc. After 4-5 questions, guess who you think the student is. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Have students play the game till 2 mins before the end of the lesson.

Activity 8: (6 mins) Speaking

1. Asks a few students what they found out about their “guess who” partner. 2. Listens for correct use of auxiliary verbs 3rd person singular. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)

Look at the board.

Respond.

Draw a tick.

Tick & cross in notebook.

Compare. Ask & answer questions.

Work in groups of 4.

Look at the picture.

Respond.

One models with the teacher.

Respond.

Play the game.

Respond.

Use of auxiliary verbs & 3rd person singular. 78

1. Tells students to write what they tell lies to their parents. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 8 on page 206 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Reminders:

Goodbye!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 3: A school day Unit 8: Going to school Lesson C: Going to school – Lazy boy Pages: 54-55 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about how you and your friends get to school. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about how they and their friends get to school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Gives instructions: - Puts the class into 2 teams (right side vs left side) - Tells students that they have 30 seconds to decide on a team name. - Asks students if they can play badminton. Asks who is the best at badminton? - Tells students that they are going to play spelling badminton. Tells students that they have one minute to look at the word list from the unit. At the end of a minute, claps your hand. Books closed!

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: Game! Spelling Badminton

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Right side Vs left side.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Asks one “player” from each team to come to the in front of the room. Gives them a racket each one. (There is no racket! That‟s funny!) Shows the class how to play. Says a word. (e.g. UGLY). Stands where the student 1 is. Says U. Then stands where the student 2 is. Says G. Then stands where the student 1 is. Says L. Then stands where the student 2 is. Says I. asks: Is that right? Students: No! Rules: if students don‟t use the “racket”, they die and the other team gets a point. If a student takes too long, the ball hits the ground and they die. If a student says the last letter of the word correctly, their team gets a point.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students What is happening? 3. Asks students why? 4. Students compare with their partner for a minute. 5. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas (but do not say who is right or wrong).

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (32 mins) Lesson C: Going to school – Lazy boy Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Students listen. 3. Students compare. 4. Check answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to try and remember/guess if it was Dara did A or B. Gives a 2 mins limit. 3. Tells students to write 1-3 in their notebooks. Then tells them

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class plays the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare. Check answers.

Work with a partner.

Guess/remember.

Write 1-3 in notebook. 81

to listen and write A or B. 4. Students listen. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Asks for answers as a class. 1. Writes He____ to school. He doesn‟t _____. On the board. 2. Asks students to tell you what goes in the blanks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Students complete and compare. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Controlled grammar practice

1. Tells students to take out a scrap piece of paper (they will give it to you after, so it cannot be in their notebooks). 2. Tells students to write 5 more “do/don‟ts” (10 sentences). Make sure students know to keep their paper secret. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. At the end of the time, clap your hands and tells students to put down their pens.

Activity 5: (7 mins) Game!

1. Collects all the student‟s papers together. 2. Tells students to come and choose a new paper and they have to keep the paper secret. Students need to ask all the students questions to try and find the owner of the paper BUT that they need to keep asking questions even when they think they have found the owner of the paper! 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. At the end of the 5 mins, clap your hands and tells students to sit down. 5. Asks some students who they think is on their paper. 6. Tells students to go and give the paper back to its owner.

Activity 6 and 7: (6 mins) Game!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Listen. Compare.

Respond.

Look at the board.

Respond.

Complete & compare. Check answers.

Prepare a piece of paper.

Write 10 more sentences.

Put their pens down.

Give the paper to the teacher.

Come and choose a new paper to find out who is the owner of the paper.

Sit down.

Respond.

Go & give the paper to its owner. 82

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write what they do/don‟t do to their parents. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 9 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) I can say what other people do. I can say what other people don‟t do. I can ask questions. I can say what I don‟t do. I can introduce my friends. Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Look at the can do statements.

Compare.

Show the class the feelings.

Listen and take note of the homework.

Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Reminders:

Goodbye!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 3: A school day Unit 9: After school Lesson A: After school – My after school favourite Pages: 56-57 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about fun activities you do after school. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce fun activities that they do after school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Gives instructions: - Tells students to stand up. - Tells students that they have a magic finger. Shows them your magic finger. Asks students to hold up their magic fingers. - Tells students that you will say a colour and they have to touch something that colour with magic finger. - Rules: if you touch the wrong colour, you are out. If you are the last one to touch a colour, you are out. - Says a colour (e.g. green) students touch something that is Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: Magic Finger – Colour Race

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

green with their “magic finger” (e.g. a bag or a pen). Tells students that they are touching the wrong colour to sit down. Repeat until there is a winner. Everyone claps!

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (45 mins) Lesson A: After school – My after school favourite

1. Gives instructions: - Puts students into groups of 4. - Tells students to look at the pictures for the new words. - Tells students what you do after school. Points to the pictures and says I do this and this I sometimes do that. I never do that… - Tells students to talk to their group and tell them what they do. - Asks instruction checking questions.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Students work with their partner. 2. Tells students to write numbers 1-10 in their notebooks. 3. Students match the letters to the numbers/pictures. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Students look at the pictures and listen and check. 6. Students listen and repeat.

Activity 2: (10 mins) New words

1. Asks students to look at the pictures. Says: What do you do after school? 2. Tells students to talk to their friends and guess for a minute. 3. Come back together as a class and get some different ideas. 1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Students listen. 3. Students compare. 4. Checks answers as a class. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class plays the game.

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully. Work in groups of 4. Look at the pictures for new words. Listen to the teacher says.

Talk to their partner.

Work with partner. Write numbers 1-10 in notebooks. Match the letters to the numbers/pictures.

Students guess: (2 mins)

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Look at the pictures.

Talk to their friends.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen to the tape. Compare answers. Check answers. 85

1. Students work with a partner. 2. Students try and remember/guess the answers to the questions. Do the first together as a class. 3. Students to write 1-9 in their notebooks. 4. Students listen and write T for Tevy P for Pich K for Kosal and R for Rith. 5. Asks instruction checking questions. 6. Students listen. 7. Students compare their answers with their partners. 8. Compare answers as a class.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Puts students into partners. If you can, change people who usually work together to make it more fun. 2. Asks students how well they know their partner. 3. Tells students that they are going to make guesses about what their partners do after school. 4. Tells students that they are not allowed to ask their partner yet. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 5: (3 mins) Preparing for speaking

1. Tells students to talk to their partner and check their guesses. 2. When both students have finished, tells them to check their scores. Do they agree?

Activity 6: (10 mins) Speaking

1. Talks about the results as a class. Asks what students got right and wrong. Encourages them to use new words. Are they confident? How is their pronunciation?

1. Tells students to write the favourite fun activities they do most after school. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 9 on page 207 in the studentâ&#x20AC;&#x;s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Work with partner. Remember/guess.

Write 1-9 in notebooks.

Listen & write T for Tevy P for Pich K for Kosal R for Rith.

Listen. Compare answers with partners. Compare answers as a class.

Work in pairs.

Respond.

Make guesses about their partners.

Not yet to ask their partners.

Talk to partner to check their guesses. Check scores. Agree or not?

Talk about their results.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (3 mins)

Goodbye! 86

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 3: A school day Unit 9: After school Lesson B: After school – How often? Pages: 58-59 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about fun activities you do after school. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce fun activities that they do after school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

1. -

Good morning everyone!

Gives instructions: Tells students to stand up. Puts class into 4 groups. Tells students to decide on a team name. Writes the team names on the board. Have one student from each group go to the board and face the class so they cannot see the board. Writes an after school activity from the last lesson. Tells the students facing the rest of the class guess the word and walk around the room. If no one has

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: The acting game

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

guessed it after a minute, tells them to look at the board. Rules: the people at the board can talk. The people trying to act and show the word are not allowed to talk. First team to guess gets a point. People who cheat lose a point. Play the game using the words from the unit (do homework, study, work, go to school, watch TVâ&#x20AC;Ś)

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson B: After school â&#x20AC;&#x201C; How often?

1. Asks: Are you busy after school? 2. Tells students that they will do a quiz to find out. 3. Tells students to read and listen and think about their answers. 4. Tells students to read along with their finger. This helps them with dyslexia and also helps you check no one is lost. 5. Asks instruction checking questions. Plays the recording. 6. Students listen and read along with their fingers.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to write numbers 1-6 in their notebooks. 2. Students write their answers as full words. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Students complete. 5. Students compare their answers with their partner. 6. Students add their scores and look at the scores to see if they are lazy.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Draws the table on the board. Writes Never next to 100% Says Is that right? Students: No! Writes Never next to 30% Says Is that right? Students: No! Writes Never next to 0% Says Is that right? Students: Yes!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 3: (5 mins) Grammar

Whole class plays the game.

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully.

Listen & read.

Write numbers 1-6.

Full word writings.

Complete. Compare answers.

Look at the board.

8. Tells students to complete the table in their notebooks.

Complete the table.

Listen carefully.

Brainstorm ideas.

Copy the table into notebooks.

1. Tells students that they are going to write their own quiz. 2. Tells students to brainstorm ideas with their partners. (e.g. Are you a good student? Are you boring? Are you lazy? Etc.) 3. Tells students to copy the table into their notebooks and to write their quiz. Encourages creativity! 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 10 mins.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Writing

1. Tells students to stand up. 2. They will ask 4 people their quiz. They should ask 2 girls and 2 boys. They should take their quiz with them so that they can remember the questions, but they have to ask the questions. 3. Gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Speaking

Stand up. Ask 2 girls & 2 boys the questions.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins)

Respond.

Pronounce.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

1. Asks students what they got in their friends quizzes. Why? 2. Listens to student‟s pronunciation.

1. Tells students to make the sentences with always, usually, sometimes, hardly ever and never. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 9 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 3: A school day Unit 9: After school Lesson C: After school – How many people can you find after school? Pages: 60-61 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about fun activities you do after school. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce fun activities that they do after school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Gives instructions: - Tells students the rules of the game (They are not allowed to speak. They have one minute to have their partner guess what they are drawing). - Divides the class into 2 teams for them to complete to guess. - Draws one of the words from Wordlist on the board (e.g. swimming). - Gives a point to the right guessing team. - Tells students to break into groups of 4. Tells students to choose a partner in their group. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: Pictionary!

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 1. Asks students to look at the pictures. What can they see? 2. Tells students to guess what order the pictures go in. 3. Students compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some different ideas from the class. 1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses but not to write. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. This helps them with dyslexia and also helps you check no one is lost. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students to write 1-6 in their notebooks and to write letters in order for Chamroen‟s day. 6. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 7. Students compare their answers. 8. Checks answers as a class. 1. Tells students to talk to their partners and tells them 4 things they do after school. Use the pictures in activity 3 if they don‟t have ideas. 2. Tells students to write about what they do after school. Use the model from Chamroeun and first, second, then finally etc. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Puts students in groups of 4. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (37 mins) Lesson C: After school – how many people can you find after school? Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

Whole class plays the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the pictures & answer.

Guess.

Compare answers.

Share ideas.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students read and listen to the model

Activity 3: (10 mins) Writing

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Listen & read.

Write numbers 1-6.

Compare answers. Check answers.

Listen carefully & talk about 4 things they do after school.

Write about what they do after school.

5. Asks students to read their writing to their group.

Read their writing to partner.

Listen carefully.

Listen & point to the table.

Copy the table into notebook.

Listen carefully.

Play the game.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare statements.

Show the class the feelings.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

1. Tells students to get their pointing fingers ready. 2. Says I never go on facebook and point at the table next to facebook where it says 0%. Repeats with other examples until students get ideas. 3. Tells students that they are going to listen to Dara and Bopha talking and to point to the table.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen to the model

1. Tells students to copy the table into their notebook. They have 2 mins. Go! 2. Tells students they are going to play a game and that they need to talk to as many different people as they can. 3. Rules: if the teacher hears Khmer, you lose a point. You get one point for each box you fill in. You get 10 points if you have boys and girls. You get an extra point for every different name.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Game! (similar to find someone who)

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students write why they do things after school. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 10 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) I can talk about what I do after school. I can say how often I do things. I can ask how often my friends do things.

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 4: In my family Unit 10: My family Lesson A: My family – Family tree Pages: 62-63 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your family and their relative ages. ~ Describing and drawing your own family tree. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their family and their relative ages & describe and draw their family tree through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Gives instructions: - Draws hangman picture on the board. - Tells students you are thinking of a word. Draws the same numbers of lines as letters in the word you want them to guess (e.g. egg = __ __ __) on the board. - Asks a few students to guess one letter at a time. - If students say a letter right, writes it on the board. - If wrong letters are given, draws the hanging man one body part Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Play Hangman!

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

at a time (head, neck, arm, etc.) Game continues until the word is guessed (win!) or all the parts of the hangman are drawn (lose!). Puts students in groups of 4/5. Students take it in turns to let other students guess the words they are thinking.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson A: My family – Family tree

Whole class plays the game.

Whole class responds.

Match the pictures with the words. Writes the words in notebooks.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

1. Students match the pictures with the words. 2. Students write the words in their notebooks. 3. Students point to the pictures as they listen and check their answers. 4. Students listen and repeat.

Activity 1: (8 mins) New words

1. Tells students use the words to tell their partner about themselves.

Activity 2: (6 mins) Speaking

Use the words to tell partner about themselves.

1. Shows Dara‟s family photo. 2. Students guess who the people are in the photo. They tell their partners. Students listen and point to the people in the photo as they hear them.

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Look at Dara‟s family photo. Guess who the people are in the photo.

1. Tells students to listen again and answer the questions in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students listen and check. 4. Students compare with their group/partner. 5. Asks and answers questions as a class. 5. Students compare with their partner for a minute. 6. Gets some different ideas from the class.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

Listen carefully.

Listen & check. Compare with partner.

Ask & answer questions.

Listen carefully.

Look at the picture & answer.

1. Tells students that the pictures are of Dara‟s family. 2. Point to the first picture. Says Who is this? Students: Dara‟s Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 5: (5 mins) Students match the words with the photos

brother! 3. Tells students to continue to match the pictures. 1. Students draw their family trees. Then in pairs, they talk about their family trees.

1. Tells students write about their family. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 10 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Match the pictures.

Draw & talk about their family trees.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Activity 6: (11 mins) Speaking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 4: In my family Unit 10: My family Lesson B: My family – I‟m smarter than that Pages: 64-65 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your family and their relative ages. ~ Describing and drawing your own family tree. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their family and their relative ages & describe and draw their family tree through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Gives instructions: - Puts students into groups of 4/5. - Gives a category (e.g. colours, parts of the body, numbers, days of the week, months of the year, school item). - Gives a time limit of 20-30 seconds. - In groups, students write down as many words as they can from the given category within the time limit. - Stops the groups after 20-30 seconds. - Award points: 1point for words Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Play „Things in common‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

written in the correct category. 5 points for words only one team wrote. The team with the most number of points at the end of the game wins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about? 1. Tells students to look at Avorng‟s photo. 2. Asks questions (e.g. how many sisters has he got?)

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson B: My family – I‟m smarter than that Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students to read about Avorng‟s family. 2. Asks them to read quickly and point to the people in Avorng‟s family photo as they read about them. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 4. Tells students to compare answers with their partner/group. 5. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students read for the big idea

1. Tells students to read the text and answer the questions in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Tells students to compare answers with partner/groups. 4. Asks and answers as a class.

Activity 3: (7 mins) Students read for the answers

1. Tells students to read the sentences and match them with the photos. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Students compare with their group/partner. 4. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Grammar model

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class plays the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the photo of Avorng.

Answers questions.

Listen carefully.

Read quickly about Avorng‟s family.

Compare answers.

Asks and answer.

Read & answer.

Compare answers.

Ask & answer as a class.

Read & match.

Compare answers.

Ask & answer as a class.

1. Students complete the exercises in the grammar box.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Grammar box

Complete the exercises.

1. In pairs, students take it in turns to compare the two pictures. They either agree or disagree.

Activity 6: (9 mins) Speaking A

Work in pairs to compare the 2 pictures.

1. Shows students some school items (e.g. pens, pencils, notebooks, books, desks, chairs). 2. Tells students to compare the items in their groups. 3. Gives rules (e.g. students must discuss their answers first in groups. When the groups has a final answer, the students should raise their hands and be acknowledged by the teacher. A group representative will say the sentence.) 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. In groups, students compare the two items.

Activity 7: (10 mins) Speaking B

Look at some school items.

Compare items in groups

Discuss for a final answer.

Compare items.

Review some of the sentences.

Using of comparative adjectives.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

1. Reviews some of the sentences as a class. 2. Are students using articles? (The pen is bigger than the marker etc.)? Are students using than? Are students confident using comparative adjectives?

1. Tells students to write and describe about their smart dog/cat. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 10 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 4: In my family Unit 10: My family Lesson C: My family – I‟m taller than my sister Pages: 66-67 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your family and their relative ages. ~ Describing and drawing your own family tree. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their family and their relative ages & describe and draw their family tree through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

1. -

Good morning everyone!

Gives instructions: Recalls adjectives. Allows students to call them out. Writes them on the board as they call them out. Writes about 10 adjectives. Lets students call out 10 names of their classmate. Writes them on the board. Puts students into group of 4/5. Gives a time limit of 2 mins. In groups, students write as many comparative sentences as they can within the time limit. Feedback: allows students to call

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer:

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

100

out their sentences. Gives points for each correct sentence. Boards some incorrect sentences. Asks questions to help students correct the sentences.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson C: My family â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Iâ&#x20AC;&#x;m taller than my sister

Whole class responds.

Look at the broken words.

Complete the rest of the word halves.

Compare answers.

Ask & answer.

Look at the board. Look at the table.

Use the codes to make sentences.

1. Tells students to look at the broken words. Asks: What goes with bro? ter? Students: No! asks: ler? Students: No! asks: ther? Students: Yes! 2. Tells students to complete the rest of the word halves in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Students compare their answers with their group/partner. 5. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 1: (7 mins) Broken words

1. Writes 5 and 10 on the board. 2. Tells students to look at the table. Asks What letter is 5? H 3. Writes H on the board. Tells students to look at the table again. Asks What letter is 10? E 4. Writes E on the board. 5. Puts students into groups. 6. Tells them to use the given code to make sentences. 7. Gives a time limit of 8 mins. 8. The first team to write the sentences wins.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Crack the code

1. Students write about themselves and one member of their family in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 10 mins.

Activity 3: (11 mins) Writing

Write about themselves and one member.

1. Puts students into 2 big teams. 2. Says a sentence (e.g. An elephant is big). 3. In teams students think of a comparative sentence (A hippo

Activity 4: (10 mins) Communicative task

Works in groups. Listen carefully.

Think of a comparative sentence.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

101

is bigger than an elephant). 4. Teams decide if their sentences are accurate.

1. Asks students to look at the „can do‟ statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about their sister. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 11 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Decide on the sentences.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner.

Show about their feelings.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins) I can talk about my family. I can draw my family tree. I can talk about two people or two things. I can describe myself and my friends.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

102

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 4: In my family Unit 11: I‟m the coolest in my family Lesson A: I‟m the coolest in my family – I‟m the best Pages: 68-69 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about extended members of your family. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce & describe extended members of their family through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Gives instructions: - Puts students into groups of 4/5. - Students in each group take turns to write words on each other‟s back, using their point fingers. - The student then guesses the word. - If the student guesses the word correctly, it‟s now his/her turn to write on another student‟s back. - Tells students to open their books. Then they choose words learnt in previous units for this activity.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Back writing‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Whole class plays the game.

103

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) Lesson A: I‟m the coolest in my family – I‟m the best

Whole class responds.

Work in groups. Think about birthday parties.

Complete the diagram.

Listen carefully.

Listen & tick.

Listen & number the pictures.

Compare answers in pairs.

Check answers.

1. Puts students into groups. 2. Asks students to think about birthday parties. Asks: What do you do? (play the games, eat, talk/chat with friends) what do you see? (balloons, cake, food, etc.) 3. Students complete the spider web diagram on birthdays in the student‟s book. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students that it is grandma‟s 80th birthday today! 2. Students listen and tick the ones they hear on their spider web diagrams.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Students listen again and number the pictures. 2. Students compare their answers in pairs, then call on some students for the answers. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Students point to the pictures as they listen and repeat.

Students listen and repeat (3 mins)

Listen & repeat.

1. Tells students to listen again. 2. Tells students to write the answers in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Students listen for the answers

Listen again. Write the answers in notebooks.

1. Students complete the exercises in the grammar box. 2. Ask instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 5 (7 mins) Grammar box

Complete the exercises.

Check answers.

1. Lets students work in pairs. 2. One student uses (x). The other student uses (O). 3. Students take it in turns to

Activity 6 (11 mins) Post task – noughts and crosses

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

104

6. 7.

answer the questions in the boxes. When a student has correctly answered in one box, that student draw his / her symbol (X) or (O) in the box. When a student has answered all questions vertically or horizontally, he/she wins. Stops students after 10mins. Asks students some questions in the game. Were there answers correct?

1. Tells students to write about themselves as the best in family. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 11 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Play the game.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

105

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 4: In my family Unit 11: I‟m the coolest in my family Lesson B: I‟m the coolest in my family – Small or big? Pages: 70-71 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about extended members of your family. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce & describe extended members of their family through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Gives instructions: - Puts students into groups of 3/4. - Tells students they will ONLY listen to the words you say. - Students shouldn‟t write anything at this point. If necessary, have them keep their notebooks and pens in their bags. - Says 5 words (e.g. brother, mum, grandpa, pencil, notebook). Students listen ONLY. - Then, each group remembers the words and writes down the words on a piece of paper. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Memory Spelling game‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Whole class plays the game.

106

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) Lesson B: I‟m the coolest in my family – Small or big?

1. Tells students to match the words with the pictures. 2. Students listen and repeat. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) New words

1. Asks: How many people live in your family? Is your family big or small? 2. Students tick the family members that live with them. 3. Students look at the photos of the two families. 4. Asks: which picture is a picture of a small family? Which picture is a picture of a big family?

Activity 2: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students to read the text quickly. 2. Gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Asks: Which is Carol‟s family picture? Which is Phalla‟s family picture? 1. Tells students to read again and answer the questions with yes or no. 2. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Check answers as a class.

1. Asks students about their family trees from previous lessons. 2. If they have it with them, asks them to include grandpa, grandma, aunts, uncles and cousins. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins. 4. Shows to the class some of the completed family trees. 1. Students answer questions about their family in notebooks. 2. Gives a time limit of 5 mins. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 3: (3 mins) Students read for the big idea

Whole class responds.

Match the words with the pictures. Listen & repeat. Check answers.

Respond.

Tick family members.

Look at the photos of the 2 families.

Respond.

Read the text.

Respond.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students read for the answers Is Carol from Cambodia? (no) Is she sometimes sad? (yes) Does she like Cartoon Network?(no) Does Phalla live in a small house? (no) Does Phalla help his mum? (yes) Is Phalla a fast swimmer? (yes) Do you help your mum? (__) Activity 5 (10 mins) Writing and drawing

Activity 6 (7 mins) Writing

Read & answer.

Check answers.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Show the class.

Answer questions.

107

1. Puts students in pairs. 2. Tells students not to show their answers to activity 6 with their partners. They should keep their answers secret. 3. Students ask and answer questions about their families. 4. Stops students after 6 mins. 5. Calls on some students to tell you what their guesses are. Were they correct?

1. Tells students to write about grandma/grandpa. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 11 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Activity 7: (8 mins) Speaking

Work in pairs. Keep their answers secret.

Ask & answer.

Tell what their guesses are.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

108

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 4: In my family Unit 11: I‟m the coolest in my family Lesson C: I‟m the coolest in my family – Family of monsters Pages: 72-73 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about extended members of your family. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce & describe extended members of their family through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

1. -

Good morning everyone!

Gives instructions: Puts students into groups of 4/5. Writes 5 sentences on the board. As you write, make sure students are not copying them on to their notebooks. Gives students 1-2 mins to memorize the sentences and written on the board. Erases the board clean. Students in groups remember the sentences and write them on a piece of paper. Gives a time of 2-3 mins. The group that remembers the most wins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Memory test‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Whole class plays the game. 109

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson C: I‟m the coolest in my family – family of monsters

1. Writes or draws a monster on the board. 2. Asks students what they think it is. Lets them guess, and then tells them it‟s a monster. 3. Asks them what they know about monsters. Accepts all answers. 4. Tells students they are going to read about a family of monsters. 5. Students use the family tree to answers yes/no questions. 6. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 6 mins. 7. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 1: (8 mins) Read for the answers

1. 2. 3. 4.

Students work in pairs. Student A turns to page 231. Student B turns to page 237. Tells students not to look at each other‟s texts. Their texts are secret. Pre-teach „Can you repeat that, please? And „Can you spell that, please?‟ gives examples of this in class. Do not translate. Student A reads his/her text. Student B writes. Then student B read his/her text, student A writes. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 12 mins. Tells students to compare their texts and check their mistakes.

Activity 2: (15 mins) Listening and writing

1. Students work in groups. 2. Tells students to complete the table about animals. 3. Gives a time limit of 10 mins. 4. Each group chooses a reporter to share their answers in class.

Activity 3: (15 mins) Writing and speaking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Look at the board. Think & guess.

Respond.

Read the text.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Compare and check.

Work in groups. Complete the table.

Choose a reporter to share answers.

110

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about a smart elephant. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 12 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins) I can talk about my family. I can draw my family tree. I can compare three or more people and things. I can describe myself and my friends.

Look at the can do statements. Compare with a partner.

Show the class their feelings.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

111

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 4: In my family Unit 12: Monsters! Lesson A: Monsters! – The scariest monster Pages: 74-75 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about who is the best at a variety of activities. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the one who is the best at a variety of activities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students to guess what you are drawing on the board. Draws a monster. 2. Asks What this is called in English? 3. Asks Are you scared of monsters? 1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks Are you scared? 3. Asks Is Dara scared of the monster?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer/Lead in

Students guess (2 mins)

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Look at the board & guess.

Respond: monster.

Respond.

Look at the picture & answer.

Respond. Respond.

112

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. - What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson A: Monsters! â&#x20AC;&#x201C; The scariest monster

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students compare with their group/partner. 4. Asks and answers as a class. 5. Asks students if they can guess who the monster really is. Gets some answers from the class. 6. Tells students to listen and to look at the picture to find out what the monster really is.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to look at the questions and to try and guess and remember the answers. 2. Tells students not to write yet, because it will take too much time to correct. 3. Tells students that they are going to check their guesses and memory from the recording. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Tells students to compare their answers with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Writes 1.2.3. down the side of the board. Tells students to look at the pictures. Asks What pictures are scary? 2. Asks Which one is just a little scary. Writes it next to number 1 Asks students which is number 2 for scary. Writes it next to number 2. Asks which picture they think is the most scary. Writes the letter next to number 3. 3. Asks students to do the others. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 3 minute limit. 5. Asks students to compare. 6. Asks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 mins) Grammar

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully.

Compare answers.

Ask & answer.

Share ideas.

Listen to tape.

Look at the questions.

Check their guesses.

Compare answers.

Check answers.

Look at the pictures & answer.

Listen carefully.

Do the others.

Compare answers. Respond. 113

1. Tells students to look at the pictures. Points to the first picture Says: He isâ&#x20AC;Ś Students: Old! 2. Writes Old on the board Says Old and point to the second column in activity 4 Old Students: Older. Writes Older on the board. Points to the column 3. Students: Oldest! 3. Tells students to continue with other words in their notebooks. Gives students a 3 minute limit. 4. Students compare. 5. Asks answers from the class.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Controlled practice

1. Asks: Who is the oldest? Guess who in the class you think is the oldest. Writes it next to number 1. 2. Tells students to answer the rest of the questions. 3. Tells them itâ&#x20AC;&#x;s ok to be wrong: just guess! 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. Do not check answers, but you can ask 1 or 2 students for their ideas. There are not right and wrong answers though, because this is about opinion activity 6 is to prepare for the writing and its important students feel their ideas are good.

Activity 5: (5 mins)

1. Tells students to quickly read the text in activity 6. Asks Is our class the same or different? This is to give students an idea about the writing structure. 2. Asks Is our class the same or different? Students: different.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Preparing for writing

1. Tells students that they are going to write about their class. They should use the ideas they wrote in activity 7 and the model in model in exercise 6. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 7: ( 10 mins) Writing

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Look at the pictures.

Look at the board & respond.

Compare answers. Respond.

Guess & respond.

Answer the rest of questions.

Read the text quickly.

Answer.

Write about their class.

114

1. Asks some students to tell the class about their class.

1. Tells students to write about a scared monster. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 12 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Tell the class about their class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

115

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 4: In my family Unit 12: Monsters! Lesson B: Monsters! – The green monster Pages: 76-77 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about who is the best at a variety of activities. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the one who is the best at a variety of activities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Asks students to take out their homework (writing) from last time. 3. Tells students to read and complete their writing. Do they agree? Tells students that it is important for them to pay attention to their friends and be polite. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Allow students a few minutes to compare their work. 6. Asks a few students to read their work to the class and asks the Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer/Lead in

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Work in groups of 4. Listen carefully.

116

1. 2. 3. 4.

rest of the class if they agree or not. Asks students to look at the picture and to cover the text. Asks who can you see? How does she feel? Allows students a minute to talk to their partners. Compare ideas as a class.

Students guess (2 mins)

Look at the picture & cover the text. Respond.

Talk to partner.

Compare ideas.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (30 mins) Lesson B: Monsters! â&#x20AC;&#x201C; The green monster

Whole class responds.

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check for their guesses. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. This helps students with dyslexia and also helps you check no one is lost. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students to compare their answer with their group/partner. 6. Check the answer as a class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

Listen carefully.

Listen along with their fingers.

Compare answers.

Check answers.

1. Writes: Do people hang out with Bopha every day? On the board. Asks students if they can work out the answer as a class. Asks students to point to where they found the answer. 2. Writes No they donâ&#x20AC;&#x;t. on the board. 3. Gives students a 5 mins limit. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Check answers as a class.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

Respond.

Compare answers.

Check answers.

1. Says who is the best at homework? Put up your hand if you are the best at homework! 2. Concept checking question: say Look! There are lots of people who are good at homework! Is there a right or wrong answer

Activity 3: (7 mins) Controlled Practice and new words

Respond.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

117

then? Students: No. There are lots of different right answers. 3. Tells students to answer the questions according to their own ideas and gives 5 mins.

Answer the questions.

1. Tells students that they are going to talk about the answers as a class. Make sure students understood that we don‟t bully or make negative people in class. 2. Asks instruction checking questions.

Activity 4: (3 mins) Class discussion

Talk about the answers.

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and learn a chant together. 2. Plays the recording. 3. Plays the recording again. Have students say the words and clap and click. 4. Tells students that you are going to have them do the chant in their groups. Tells students to use the pictures to help them. 5. Finally do the chant as a whole class. Have students yell out who they think is the best at activities as in the recording.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Chant!

Listen carefully.

Listen. Listen again.

Whole class does the chant.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

1. Tells students to write about what they would do if they saw a monster. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 12 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

118

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 4: In my family Unit 12: Monsters! Lesson C: Monsters! – The hungry monster Pages: 78-79 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about who is the best at a variety of activities. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the one who is the best at a variety of activities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities

Student’s Activities

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students to stand up. 2. Puts students into groups of 4. 3. Tells students to decide on a team name. 4. Have one student from each group go to the board and face the class so they cannot see the board. 5. Writes a word on the board (e.g. fishing). Tells students facing the rest of the class Guess the word and pretend to fish. If no one has guessed it after a minute, tells them to look at the board. 6. Rules: - The people at the board can talk. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: The acting game

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

119

The people trying to act and show the word are not allowed to talk. 7. People who cheat lose a point. 8. Play the game. Use the words from the unit (do homework, study, work, go to school, watch TV,).

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about? 1. Teaches the word opposite through examples (black/white up/down). 2. Tells students to look at the picture. Points to a. Asks is she young? Students: No, she is old. Asks who is young?? Students point to the baby (m). 3. Tells students to match the pictures with the opposite. Tells them not to write. Point. Gives a time limit of 2 mins for this. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Checks the answers as a class

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (30 mins) Lesson C: Monsters! â&#x20AC;&#x201C; The hungry monster Activity 1: (4 mins) Review new words

1. Look at the first word in activity 2 (young). 2. Asks students to decide which picture is Young. (m) have students match the words with the pictures. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 4. Students compare with their group/partner. 5. Listen and check. 6. Asks students what the comparative and superlative adjectives are. (1 minute)

Activity 2: (6 mins) New words

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students compare their answers with their partner/group 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (2 mins) Students guess

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully.

Look at the pictures.

Match the pictures with opposite.

Check answers.

Look at the first word.

Decide on the picture.

Compare answers.

Listen & check.

Compare answers.

Checks answers. 120

1. Tells students to try and remember/guess if it was Dara of Sophal. Sets a 3 mins limit. 2. Tells students to write a-f in their notebooks. Then tells them to listen and write D for Dara and S for Sophal. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Students listen. 5. Students compare.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to read the text in activity 5 quickly. Asks Is your family the same or different? 2. Asks Is your family the same or different? Students: different!

Activity 5: (3 mins) Preparing for writing – looking at a model

1. Tells students that they are going to write about their family. 2. They can use activity 5 as a model. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 9 mins.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Writing

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about their family. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 13 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Try & remember/guess.

Write a-f in notebooks.

Listen. Compare.

Read the text.

Respond.

Write about their family.

Use activity 5 as a model.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner.

Show the feelings.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: (5 mins) Learner assessment and lesson wrap up I can say who the biggest, youngest, oldest in my family are. I can talk about who the best at something is.

121

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 5: Tell me about it! Unit 13: Guess what I‟ve got Lesson A: Guess what I‟ve got – My friend Tom Pages: 80-81 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing how your classmates and some monsters look. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe how their classmates and monsters look through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

2. Gives instructions: - Tells students to stand up. - Tells students that they have a magic finger. Shows them your magic finger. Asks students to hold up their magic fingers. - Tells students that you will say a colour and they have to touch something that colour with magic finger. - Rules: if you touch the wrong colour, you are out. If you are the last one to touch a colour, you are out. - Says a colour (e.g. green) students touch something that is

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Game! Magic Finger – Colour Race

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

122

green with their “magic finger” (e.g. a bag or a pen). Tells students that they are touching the wrong colour to sit down. Repeat until there is a winner. Everyone claps!

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (45 mins) Lesson A: Guess what I‟ve got – My friends

1. Asks: What colour are my eyes? Students: Brown! 2. Points to number 2 and says: I have got brown eyes. 3. Tells students to tell their partners which things they have got.

Activity 1: (2 mins) New words

1. Tells students to write the new words next to the letter of the picture in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Tells students to compare with their group/partner before they listen and check. 4. Tells students to listen and repeat as a class.

Activity 2: (8 mins) New words

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students who is in the picture? What are they doing? 3. Asks students why is Linda smiling? 4. Students compare their guesses with their partner for a minute.

Students guess (2 mins)

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students compare with their group/partner. 4. Check answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to try and

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class plays the game.

Answer. Look and listen.

Tell their partners the things they have got.

Write new words next to the letter of the picture in notebook.

Compare answers.

Listen & repeat.

Look at the picture & answer the questions. Answer.

Answer.

Compare answers/guesses.

Listen & check.

Compare answers.

Check as a class.

Work with a partner. Try and remember/guess answers. 123

4. 5. 6.

remember/guess what the answers are. Gives a 3 mins limit. Tells students to write 1-6 in their notebooks and then to tick and cross. Students correct incorrect sentences in their books. Students compare. Asks for answers as a class.

1. Asks students to look at the grammar box. 2. Writes 1. We use have got/has got with I, you, we, they. Asks students which. Asks students to point to the example sentence where they found the answer. 3. Tells students to continue answering the questions in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 3 mins time limit. 5. Students compare. 6. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Grammar

1. Asks students to look at the picture of the monster. 2. Writes: He is got big feet. Asks: Is that right? Students: No! Writes: He has got big feet. Asks: Is that right? Students: Yes! 3. Tells students to continue answering questions in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 3 mins time limit. 5. Students compare. 6. Asks and answers as a class.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Controlled practice

1. Tells students that you want them to draw their own monster and colour it in. Tells students that the monster can be as scary or cute as they like. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 3 mins time limit. 3. Tells students to write sentences

Activity 7: (13 mins) Free practice

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Write 1-6 & tick/cross.

Correct incorrect sentences.

Compare answers. Share answers.

Look at the grammar box.

Respond.

Answer the questions in notebooks.

Compare answers. Ask & answer.

Look at the picture of the monster. Respond.

Answer the questions in notebooks.

Compare answers. Ask & answer.

Listen carefully and to draw a monster.

Write sentences about monster. 124

about monster! 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 5 mins time limit. 5. Asks students to talk about their monster with their partner. 6. Asks instruction checking questions and give a 4 mins time limit.

1. Asks 2 or 3 students to share their pictures and sentences with the class. 2. Asks students to vote on the scariest monster.

1. Tells students to write about what their parents have got. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 13 on page 207 in the studentâ&#x20AC;&#x;s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Talk about monster with partner.

Share their pictures & sentences.

Vote on the scariest monster!

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins)

Teacherâ&#x20AC;&#x;s self reflection on todayâ&#x20AC;&#x;s lesson: .............................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

125

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 5: Tell me about it! Unit 13: Guess what I‟ve got Lesson B: Guess what I‟ve got – Guess who! Pages: 82-83 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing how your classmates and some monsters look. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe how their classmates and monsters look through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Gives instructions: - Writes the words to the song on the board. - Tells the students that they are going to learn a song. - Plays the recording once and have students join in when they know the words. - Shows students the actions to the song (touch the body part as you say the word). - Sing the song and do the actions together as a class. - Sing the song faster and faster. Who can keep up? Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Song!

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

Sing the song together.

126

1. Writes the word Thief on the board and asks students if they know what it means. Asks the answer and if no one guesses, tells them it is someone who steals. 2. Asks students some questions to get them to think about thieves. What do they steal?

Lead in (3 mins)

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (31 mins) Lesson B: Guess what Iâ&#x20AC;&#x;ve got â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Guess who!

1. Asks students to look at the picture (and to cover the text). What can they see? 2. Tells students that one of the people they can see on the page has stolen something from Dara. Can they guess who? Tells students to talk to their partner/group. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 min. 4. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students they are going to hear some clues from Dara about who the thief is. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Plays the recording! 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students to use the clues to discuss who they think the thief is with their partner. 6. Checks students guess as a class. Writes some guesses on the board.

Activity 2: (6 mins) Students read/listen for the big idea/answers

1. Tells students to check their guesses at the back of the book. Were they right? Who was closest? 1. Tells students to look at the picture and answer the questions. 2. Asks instruction checking Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Look at the board to answer.

Answer.

Look at the picture & to cover the text. Guess who the thief is.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen & Read along with fingers. Use the clues to discuss on the thief.

Check their guesses.

Activity 3: (1 min) Students check their guesses

Check their guesses.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Vocabulary review

Look at the picture & to answer.

127

questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Students compare their answers with a partner. 4. Checks answers as a class. 1. Writes 1-20 on the board. 2. Tells students to look at the photos. Asks how many photos? Students: 20! 3. Tells one student to pick a photo between 1 and 20 and to write the number on a piece of paper but NOT TO TELL YOU. 4. Asks 5-6 yes/no questions and cross the number as you eliminate them. (e.g. is it a girl?). yes cross out the numbers for boys). Have they got long hair? Yes! Cross out all the numbers of people who have short hair. 5. After 5 questions, guess which person from the photos.

Activity 5: (2 mins) Modeling the game

1. Tells students that they are going to play the same game. 2. Drills the “Useful Language” in the box. 3. Tells students the rules Rules: - Students play against a partner. - First, students choose a photo between 1-20. The students write the number somewhere secret (so students don‟t change their mind and cheat!). students take it turns to ask yes/no questions to try and guess who their partner has chosen. If you ask a question and the answer is no, it is the other persons turn… if you ask a question and the answer is yes, you get to ask another question. The first person to guess their partners number (photo) is the winner. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 10-15 mins.

Activity 5: (15 mins) Game!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Compare answers.

Check answers.

Look at the board.

Look at the photos.

One picks a photo to write the number.

Answer.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

128

1. Asks a few pairs who won. 2. Asks students what they found out about their partners „Guess who‟. Tells the whole class to listen along and see if they could guess the person as well! 3. Thanks students for their hard work.

1. Tells students to write about a thief they have ever known. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 13 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins)

Respond.

Share ideas found from their partners.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

129

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 5: Tell me about it! Unit 13: Guess what I‟ve got Lesson C: Guess what I‟ve got – Is that him? Pages: 84-85 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing how your classmates and some monsters look. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe how their classmates and monsters look through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Spelling badminton!

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

130

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (47 mins) Lesson C: Guess what I‟ve got – Is that him?

1. Asks students to look at the picture and to cover the text at the bottom with another book. What can they see? 2. Asks students what is happening? 3. Students compare their guesses with their partner for a minute. 4. Come back together as a class and get some different ideas.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to read along with Linda and Bopha and try and get clues about which one Tom is. 2. Tells students to discuss who they think Tom is with their partner and WHY. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Asks some ideas as a class. Takes a class vote. (e,g, who is think it‟s the one on the right? Put up your hand!) Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 2: (10 mins) Model for speaking game

Play the game.

Look at the picture & to cover the text.

Respond.

Compare their guesses.

Share ideas.

Read to know who Tom is.

Discuss with partner.

Share ideas about Tom.

131

5. Tells the class to look at the answer on page 232. 1. Tells students to work with their partner. They are going to play a guessing game. 2. Tells students the rules. Rules: first students choose a student and write their name somewhere secret. (so students don‟t change their mind halfway through!) if you asks a question and the answer is no, it is the other persons turn. If you ask a question and the answer is yes, you get another question. The first person to guess the other persons kid is the winner and gets 5 points. NO PUT DOWN. If students say mean and nasty things like Is she ugly? They lose all their points! 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 10 mins.

Activity 3: (10 min) Game!

1. Books closed. Writes: Do you have any sisters? And Have you got any sisters? On the board. 2. Asks students what the difference is. Gives them a minute to discuss with their partner. Asks the answer as a class. (They mean exactly the same) 3. Tells students that they have 4 mins to write as many sentences as they can using the pictures in Activity 4. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. At the end of the time, clap your hands, tells students to put their pens down and asks How many? 6. Asks the student with the most to read out their answers. Are they all correct?

Activity 4: (5 mins) Controlled practice

1. Tells students to draw 5 things in their notebooks. 2. Tells students they are going to play a game. 3. Rules: students take it turns to ask “Have you got any…?” and “Do you have any…?” questions

Activity 5: (10 mins) Game!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

Close the books & answer.

Respond.

Write sentences.

Stop writing.

Read their sentences.

Draws 5 things in notebooks.

Listen carefully.

132

to their partner. They must answer very quickly but they have to use the right short answer. (yes, I have. Yes, I do. ) 4. If they say the wrong thing or take too long, the other player gets a point. Tells students to record their points on a separate piece of paper. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 5 mins limit. 6. At the end of time, clap your hands and find out who the winners were. 1. Asks students to answer the questions about them in their notebooks using full short answers. 2. Asks instruction checking question. 3. Students compare their answers with their partner.

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write what you have and haven‟t got. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 14 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Personalization

Answer the questions.

Compare answers.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner. Show the class the feelings.

Step V: Closing (3 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins) I can ask what people have got. I can say what people have and haven‟t got. I can name some parts of the body.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

133

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 5: Tell me about it! Unit 14: How do you feel today? Lesson A: How do you feel today? – Get out of bed! Pages: 86-87 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about you and your friends feel today. ~ Describing what makes you and your friends feel sad, unhappy, angry, etc. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their feeling and their friends feeling & describe something makes them and their friends feel sad and unhappy through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Gives instructions: - Uses the board eraser or a pencil case. Asks What is it? Talk into it like a phone. Students: it‟s a phone. - Tells students that they are going to play a game in their groups. - Rules: you get a point if your friends can guess what you are pretending the eraser is. But all the members lose a point if they can‟t guess. The person with the eraser is not allowed to talk. The group must speak in English! Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) „Pass the eraser‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

134

Some ideas: an egg, a bird, a cat, a pen, a notebook, lunch, an apple, an orange, a friend, a game. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson A: How do you feel today? â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Get out of bed!

1. Books closed. Asks students how they feel today. 2. Books open. Asks students to tell their friends which picture they feel the most like.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students remember words

1. Tells students to work in groups to write the new words next to the letter of the picture in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Tells students to listen and check their answers. 4. Tells students to listen and repeat. 1. Asks students to look at the picture in activity 3. What can they see? 2. Asks students What can you see in the picture? 3. Asks students Why is Dara bed? 4. Students compare with their partner for a minute. 5. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 2: (7 mins) New words

Students guess (2 mins)

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Students listen. 3. Students compare. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to try and remember/guess if the sentences were true or false. Gives a 3 mins limit.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class plays the game.

Close the books

Show the feeling.

Work in groups.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Look at the picture.

Answer the question.

Respond.

Compare answers.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare. Check.

Work with a partner.

Try & remember/guess True/False.

135

3. Tells students to write 1-6 in their notebooks. Then tell them to listen and Tick and Cross the numbers as they hear them. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Students listen. 6. Students compare. 7. Asks for some answers as a class. 1. Books closed. Writes I feel bored whenâ&#x20AC;Ś on the board and gets 3 or 4 ideas from students about how to end the sentence. (e.g. I feel bored when I am at home. I feel bored when I am in maths. I feel bored when I donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t have school). 2. Tells students to complete the sentences about them. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives an 8 mins time limit.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Writing

1. Writes: Do you feel___ when you _____? On the board. Asks some students how to complete the sentence. Gets 2 or 3 different ideas. 2. Tells students that they are going to play a game and try to find people who are the same as them from their list. 3. Rules: - asks your classmates questions to find out if the same things make them happy. If they are the same as you, you can write down their name. You cannot write their name if they are different to you. You must have half boy and half girls. You can only write any name once! 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 6: (8 mins) Game! Find someone the same as you

1. Asks students to report back on who they found that was the same as them. 2. Do the examples they give match the vocab? 3. Listens for 3rd person singular Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins)

Write 1-6 in notebooks/Tick & Cross.

Listen. Compare. Share answers.

Close the books & look at the board.

Complete the sentences about them.

Look at the board & listen carefully.

Listen carefully.

Play the game.

Report back on who the same them was.

Think of 3rd person singular. 136

„S‟ Sophal feels /fi:lz/ happy when he passes /pa:siz/ an exam. 4. Are they using a full clause after when?

1. Tells students to write about the activities they often do after they get up. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 14 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

137

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 5: Tell me about it! Unit 14: How do you feel today? Lesson B: How do you feel today? – How does it make you feel? Pages: 88-89 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about you and your friends feel today. ~ Describing what makes you and your friends feel sad, unhappy, angry, etc. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their feeling and their friends feeling & describe something makes them and their friends feel sad and unhappy through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Gives instructions: - Asks students to stand up. Can they remember Heads, Shoulders, Knees and Toes from the last unit? - Sing it as a class. - Says one of the new words and sings the song again in that emotions (e.g. sad! Half crying half singing) - Repeat with 3-4 emotions (e.g. happy, sick, bored, excited).

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: „Sing the song‟

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

Whole class sings the song.

138

1. Puts students into groups of 4. Asks students to choose one person to be the writer. 2. Tells students to brainstorm as many animals as they can. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Finds out which group got the most. Students compare answers as a class.

Lead in (5 mins)

1. Asks students to look at the picture and to cover the text. What can they see? 2. Asks students how many animals they can name in the picture. 3. Asks students How does Sophal feel about animals? 4. Students compare with a partner for a minute. 5. Come back together as a class to get some different ideas.

Students guess (2 mins)

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (34 mins) Lesson B: How do you feel today? â&#x20AC;&#x201C; How does it make you feel?

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. This helps students with dyslexia and also helps you check no one is lost. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Fingers ready? Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students to compare their answers with their group/partner. 6. Checks the answers as a class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Writes Who does Sophal go to when he thinks people donâ&#x20AC;&#x;t understand him? On the board. Asks students the answer. Asks students to show you where they found the answer in the text. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 5 mins time limit.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Work in groups of 4 & to choose the writer.

Brainstorm on animals.

Compare answers.

Look at the picture & cover the text. Answer.

Answer.

Compare answers.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Listen & read.

Compare answers.

Check answers.

Look & answer.

139

3. Students complete. 4. Students compare with their group/partner. 5. Checks answers as a class. 1. Tells students to work in groups of 4 and discuss the questions. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Compare answers as a class.

Activity 3: (3 min) Post task

1. Tells students to look at the pictures and try to remember the words. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. (2 mins) 3. Asks and answers as a class. (30 seconds)

Activity 4: (3 mins) Review vocabulary

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? What are Bopha and Dara doing? 2. Students compare with their partner for a minute. 3. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas. 4. Listen again and check. 5. Checks the answer as a class. 1. Tells students to take out their notebooks and to write one feeling. Keep it secret! 2. Tells students to write 2 or 3 reasons that someone might feel this feeling. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 3 mins limit. 3. Tells students to stand up. They will need a pen and a piece of paper. 4. Tells students that they are going to play the same game as Bopha and Dara. Rules: if you speak in Khmer, you lose your points. If you guess how your friend feels, you get a point. If someone guesses how you feel, you get a point. 5. Tells students to show their feeling to as many people as possible during the time. 6. Asks instruction checking Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 5: (3 mins) Listen to the model of the game

Activity 6: (10 mins) Game! You will have to set up this activity step by step so that students don‟t say “I have no ideas”

Complete. Compare.

Check.

Work in groups of 4 & discuss the questions.

Compare answers.

Look at the pictures & try to remember the words.

Share answers.

Look at the picture & answer.

Compare answers.

Share ideas.

Listen & check. Check as a class.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

140

questions and gives a 5 mins limit.

1. Asks a few students to act their feeling for the class. Have the class guess the feelings. 2. Monitor the students‟ pronunciation. Are they putting the stress in the right place? (e.g HAPpy not hapPY).

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Tells students to write about how Homework: their dog/cat makes you feel. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 14 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Play the game.

Show their feeling to the class.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

141

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 5: Tell me about it! Unit 14: How do you feel today? Lesson C: How do you feel today? – I know how you feel Pages: 90-91 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about you and your friends feel today. ~ Describing what makes you and your friends feel sad, unhappy, angry, etc. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their feeling and their friends feeling & describe something makes them and their friends feel sad and unhappy through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Gives instructions: - Writes some first meeting vocab on the board. E.g. Hi. How are you? What‟s your name? - Tells students to stand up. (You can have student work in groups if it is too small to have students walking around the room). - Tells students that they are going to do a get to know you role play. - Have students do the activity once normally. - Tells students to choose a

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: „Feeling greetings‟

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

142

different partner, but this time their parents have given their sister $100 and given them nothing! How do they feel? Tell students to have the conversation with this feeling. Keep changing the situation (and partners!). Dog is deed. You have a million dollars! Etc.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (35 mins ) Lesson C: How do you feel today? – I know how you feel

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students How do the people feel? 3. Asks students Why? 4. Students talk and compare with their partner for 3 mins. 5. Comes back together and gets some different ideas.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students to write 1-8 in their notebooks. 2. Writes “My best friend doesn‟t like me anymore.” On the board. Asks “Who says this?” students: B. 3. Tells students to write the letters next to the number in their notebook. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 5 mins time limit. 5. Students compare. 6. Students listen and check.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Matching activity

1. Writes My best friend doesn‟t like me anymore. On the board. Asks how do they feel? Students: sad 2. Tells students to write the feelings next to the number in their notebooks. 3. Gives a 3 mins time limit and asks instruction checking questions. 4. Students listen and check.

Activity 3: (5 min) New words review

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Start the conversation.

Look at the picture.

Answer.

Compare answers.

Share ideas.

Write 1-8 in notebooks.

Write the letters next to the numbers.

Compare answers. Listen & check.

Look at the board & answer.

Write the feelings next to the numbers.

Listen & check.

143

1. Tells one student that you know them. 2. Drops an eraser onto the book and see where it lands. 3. Tells students which picture the eraser is on. (e.g. Hungry.) 4. Says something you think might be true about this student and this feeling (e.g. You feel hungry when you don‟t have breakfast.) says Is that right? Students: Yes, that‟s right or No, that‟s not right. 5. Tells students that they are going to play a game like this. 6. Rules: students take turns to drop the eraser onto the book. If they can guess a fact about their partner, they get a point. If they don‟t guess, they don‟t get a point. 7. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 10 mins limit. 8. At the end of the time, clap your hands and find out who was the winner in each group.

Activity 4: (15 mins) Game!

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins) I can say how I feel. I can say when my friends and I feel things. Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Tells students to write about how Homework: they feel about their parents. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 15 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! 1. Asks students to look at the “can do” statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner. Show their feeling to the class.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

144

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 5: Tell me about it! Unit 15: What in the world are you wearing? Lesson A: What in the world are you wearing? – I‟m wearing something scary! Pages: 92-93 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing what you‟re wearing and talking about what you usually wear. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe what they‟re wearing & talk about what they usually wear through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Tells students to ask you any Warmer/Review (5 mins) questions they want. Answer Warmer: „Banana-na‟ Banana-na! Answer 4 questions like this. - Tells students that they are going to play this game in groups. - Rule: - students work in groups and chose one person to be “it”. - The student has to answer 5 questions with Bananana. They cannot laugh or pause. If they make it to the end of 5 questions, they get 5 points. If the group make them laugh, they get one point. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

145

Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson A: What in the world are you wearing? – I‟m wearing something scary! 1. Tells students to cover exercise 2 Activity 1: (2 mins) and tell their partner what they New words are wearing today. Tells students to point to the pictures. (e.g. I‟m wearing 1,6 and 9) 2. Asks instruction checking questions.

Play the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

1. Tells students to write 1-10 in their book. Writes 1 on the board. 2. Tells students to look at number one. Says What‟s this? Students: a shirt. Asks and point at number one. Says What do I write here then? Students: b. 3. Tells students to match the other numbers and letters in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Students compare their answers with their group/partner. 6. Tells students to listen and check their answers. 7. Tells students to listen and repeat and point to the pictures as they hear them.

Activity 2: (5 mins) New words

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Points to the picture of the kids in costume. Asks Which is the scariest? Best? 3. Students compare with partner for a minute. 4. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 3: (2 min) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and match the people with their costumes. 2. Students listen. 3. Students compare with their Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Cover the exercise 2 & tell partner what they‟re wearing today.

Write 1-10.

Look & respond.

Match the numbers with the letters.

Compare answers.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Look at the picture & answer.

Compare answers.

Share answers.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Lead in and listening for the big idea -

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare answers. 146

group/partner. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Check answers.

Work with a partner.

Write 1-8 in notebooks.

Write the answers next to the numbers.

Listen. Compare. Share answers.

Shut the books. Look at the board.

Think & talk.

Listen carefully.

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write 1-8 in their notebooks. Tells students to try and remember/guess the answers. 3. Tells them to listen and write the answers next to the numbers in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Students listen. 6. Students compare. 7. Asks for some answers as a class.

Activity 5: (7 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Tell students to shut their books. 2. Writes Scary dress ups on the board. 3. Asks students what other scary dress ups they can think of. Gives them a minute to talk to their partner and gets ideas from the class. 4. Talks as a class about how you could dress up as three things (e.g. A white dress on your head and be a ghost).

Activity 6: (2 mins) Brainstorming – class discussion

1. Tells students that you want them to draw their own Halloween costume. Tells them to be creative like Bopha! 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 3 mins limit.

Activity 7: (5 mins) Prepare to speak

Draw the Halloween costume.

1. Collects all the students‟ papers together. 2. Drills target language. What are you wearing? I‟m wearing __. 3. Tells students to come and collect a piece of paper that is not their own. 4. Tells students that they need to keep it secret. 5. Have students ask “What are you wearing?” questions to try and find their piece of paper.

Activity 8: (12 mins) Game!

Gives the paper to the teacher.

Answer.

Collect one is not theirs.

Find the owner of the paper.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

147

1. Asks some students to tell the class what they are wearing in their picture.

1. Tells students to write about the costumes they usually wear when they go out. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 15 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Tell the class what they‟re wearing.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

148

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 5: Tell me about it! Unit 15: What in the world are you wearing? Lesson B: What in the world are you wearing? – I look cool Pages: 94-95 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing what you‟re wearing and talking about what you usually wear. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe what they‟re wearing & talk about what they usually wear through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Gives instructions: - Stands in front of the class and says What am I wearing? - Mime putting on 2 or 3 pieces of clothing (e.g. pretend to put on shoes, socks, and a hat. - Asks students What am I wearing? Shoes, socks, hat! - Tells students to work in groups 4 and take it in turns to pretend to put on an item of clothing. Can their friends guess?

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: What are you wearing?

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

Play the game.

149

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) Lesson B: What in the world are you wearing? – I look cool

1. Asks students to look at the cartoon but not to read the text. What can they see? 2. Asks students to guess what is happening in the picture. 3. Students compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to read and check their guesses and answer the question “Why is Dara wearing a sock on his head?” 2. Tells students to read the cartoon. This helps students with dyslexia and also helps you check no one is lost. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Students read the cartoon. 5. Students compare their answer. 6. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read for the big idea

1. Do the first question together as a class. Have students point to where the answer is in the text. 2. Tells students to do the other questions in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 5 mins limit. 4. Students complete. 5. Students compare answers. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students read for the answers

1. Students practice the tongue twister. 2. Students practice, clap and repeat. 3. Lets students work with their partner for a few minutes to learn the tongue twister. 4. Comes back together as a class. Recites as a class. 5. Tells students to replace “a sock on your head” with their own

Activity 4: (10 mins) Learn a tongue twister

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Look at the cartoon & answer.

Guess what is happening in the picture. Compare ideas.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Read the cartoon. Compare answer. Check answer.

Do the first question as a class.

Do the other questions in notebooks.

Complete. Compare answers. Check answers.

Practice the tongue twister.

Practice, clap & repeat.

Work with a partner for the tongue twister.

Use own ideas. 150

ideas. 6. Race! Have 2 or more students read the tongue twister as quickly as they can. Who finished first? 7. Students practice the tongue twister for homework and have a competition the next day.

Read the tongue twister quickly.

Respond.

Share ideas.

1. Asks students what is cool to wear after school? Gets 1 or 2 ideas from the class. 2. Tells students that everyone has a different idea of what cool is to talk to their friends about what they think is cool. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Brainstorming ideas for writing

1. Tells students that they are going to draw something cool for a boy to wear after school and something cool for a girl to wear after school. They can use coloured pencil, or they can put arrows and words for colours. 2. Asks instruction checking questions.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Making notes

Draw something cool for a boy and a girl to wear after school.

1. Tells students to look at the example. 2. Tells students to add descriptions to their pictures. 3. Asks instruction checking questions.

Activity 7: (5 mins) Writing

Look at the example.

Add descriptions to the pictures.

Decide on their favorite.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher. 151

1. Pen down! Asks students to decide on their favourite in their group. 2. Vote as a class!

1. Students practice the tongue twister for homework and have a competition the next day. (Activity 4) 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 15 on page 207 in the studentâ&#x20AC;&#x;s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

152

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 5: Tell me about it! Unit 15: What in the world are you wearing? Lesson C: What in the world are you wearing? – Wear something special Pages: 96-97 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing what you‟re wearing and talking about what you usually wear. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe what they‟re wearing & talk about what they usually wear through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Draws a picture of an elephant on the board. 2. Choose a word (e.g. shoes, socks, a shirt, a skirt). 3. Writes a line for each letter on the board. 4. Asks a student to guess a letter. 5. If the letter is in the word, writes it in the correct space. 6. If the letter is not in the word, writes it elsewhere on the board and erases one part of the elephant (i.e. begin with the trunk, then the eye, then the mouth, etc.) Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: „Disappearing elephant‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

153

7. Repeats steps 4-6 until students have guessed the word. 8. Puts students into groups of 5/6. 9. In groups, students play the game. They take it in turns to draw the elephant and lets other students guess. 1. Books closed. Writes Weddings, Churches, Parties, and Dances on the board. 2. Gives students a minute to see if they know any of the words. 3. Gets the word meanings from the class. If no one knows teach these words. 4. Asks students to talk to their group about what they know about weddings, churches, parties and dances. 5. Asks instruction checking questions. 1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Lead in (5 mins)

Play the game.

Close the books & look at the words on the board.

See the words if they know.

Tells the meanings of words.

Talk about the words on the board with partner/group.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (32 mins) Lesson C: What in the world are you wearing? â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Wear something special

1. Asks students to look at the pictures and to cover the text. What can they see? 2. Asks students Who is dressed for a wedding, church, a dance? 3. Students compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Comes together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to read and check their guesses. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Plays the recording. 4. Students read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students compare their answer with their group/partner. 6. Checks answer as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read for the big idea

1. Writes Reginald is wearing shorts and a T-shirt. On the board.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture & cover the text.

Respond.

Compare answers.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Read.

Compare answer.

Check answer.

Look at the board. 154

2. Asks Is that right? Students: No, that‟s not right. Asks What is Reginald wearing today? Students: “He is wearing an orange shirt, black trousers, and black shoes”. Asks What does Reginald usually wear? Students: He usually wear shorts and a T-shirt. 3. Tells students write 2 similar sentences about Kate, Faith and Shin Mae How. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 5 mins limit. 4. Students complete. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class. 1. Puts students into groups. 2. Tells students to look at the pictures. Asks what do you usually wear to a wedding? Students: I usually wear___. 3. Tells students to talk in their groups about what they usually wear to these places. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 3 mins limit. 5. Students talk. 6. Gets some ideas from the class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Speaking

1. Asks students to guess where you are. Close your eyes and describe a place they know that is not school. Students guess. Tells students that when you pretend like this, you imagine. 2. Tells students that they are going to play a game. They imagine that they are in one of the places in the pictures and say what they are wearing. Their friends listen and get a point if they guess correctly. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 5 mins limit. 4. Students play the game.

Activity 5: (8 mins) Speaking. Game!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Respond.

Writes 2 sentences.

Complete. Compare.

Check.

Work in groups.

Look at the pictures & respond.

Listen carefully.

Talk. Share ideas.

Guess where the teacher is.

Listen carefully.

Play the game.

155

Asks students what they are wearing today. 2. Asks students what they usually wear to… 3. Are students using present simple and continuous appropriately?

1. Tells students to write about what they usually wear to a concert. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 16 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins)

Respond.

Use present simple & present continuous.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

156

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 6: My life after school Unit 16: I can do it! Lesson A: I can do it! – I can do it better! Pages: 98-99 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what you can and cannot do. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they can and cannot do through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Shows students your pen. 2. Tells them you are thinking of some words about the pen. 3. Asks students to give you answers. Uses questions to help them (e.g. what colour is my pen? What shape is it?) 4. Writes down words as students tell them (e.g. pen – black, long, write, school) 5. Puts students into groups of 5/6. 6. Tells students you are going to say a word. Thinks of words associated with the word. Example: apple – red, fruit, Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Word Association‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

157

food, eat, USA, ball-round, football, basketball, volleyball, white, black, orange, sports, team school – bags, students, desks, books, teachers, etc… 7. The group with the most number of words wins. 1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. In pairs, students look for the words in the picture. 3. Tells students to match the words with the pictures. 4. Tells students to listen and check. 5. Tells students to listen and repeat.

Play the game.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson A: I can do it! – I can do it better!

Whole class responds.

Activity 1: (5 mins) New words

Work with a partner.

Look for the words in the pictures. Match the words with the pictures. Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Close the books.

Listen carefully.

Answer: Yes, he can. No, he can‟t. Have a class vote!

Listen carefully.

Guess.

Listen & point to the pictures.

1. Tells students to close their books. 2. Tells students that Dara and Avorng can do some of the new words. 3. Asks: Can Dara sing? Can Avorng sing? Students should say Yes, he can. No he can‟t. 4. Have a class vote. Counts how many students think Avorng can sing. Writes the number on the board. - How many students think Dara can play guitar? - How many students think Dara can ride a bike? 5. Asks students who they think is better, Dara or Avorng?

Lead in (3 mins)

1. Tells students they are going to listen to Avorng and Dara. 2. Were their guesses right? Who do they think is better – Avorng or Dara? 3. Tells students to open their books and point to the pictures as they can listen.

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

158

1. Tells students to copy the table in their notebooks quickly. Gives a time limit of 2 mins. 2. Tells students to listen again and tick the sentences. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Copy the table into notebooks.

Listen again & tick the sentences. Compare answers.

Check answers.

Activity 4: (4 mins) Students listen and repeat

Listen & repeat.

1. Writes one sentence on the board that is true about you (e.g. I can speak English). 2. Writes one more sentence that is not true about you (e.g. I can cook). 3. Tells students to guess which is right and which is wrong. 4. Have a class vote! How many students think you can speak English? How many students think you can cook? Writes the number on the board. 5. Tells students which is right and which is wrong. 6. Tells students that they are going to do the same. They will write true and not true sentences about them. 7. Gives a time limit of 6 mins.

Activity 5: (8 mins) Writing

Look at the sentences on the board.

Think & guess.

Have a class vote!

Get the real answer.

Do the same!

1. Puts students into groups of 5/6. 2. Students take it in turns to read their sentences. Other students say Yes, you can or No, you can‟t. 3. Tells students not to write. They just listen and speak.

Activity 6: (7 mins) Guessing game – speaking

Work in groups of 5/6. Take turns to read their sentences.

Others just listen & say: Yes, you can or No, you can‟t.

Work in different groups.

Take turns to talk about their group mates‟ sentences from the activity 6. Remember sentences!

1. Tells students to listen and repeat.

1. Puts students into different groups. 2. Each group takes it in turn to talk about their group mates from the activity 6. 3. How many sentences can they remember?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 3: (5 min) Students listen for the answers

Activity 7: (6 mins) Speaking

159

1. Asks some students to tell you about what they can / can‟t do. 2. Asks some students to tell you about what their friends can / can‟t do.

1. Tells students to write about what their parents can / can‟t do. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 16 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Tell about what they can / can‟t do. Tell about what their friends can / can‟t do.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

160

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 6: My life after school Unit 16: I can do it! Lesson B: I can do it! – I think I can fly! Pages: 100-101 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what you can and cannot do. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they can and cannot do through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students you are a clock. 2. Shows different times to students. Use both your arms, like this. 3. Asks: what time is it? Is it12 o‟clock? Students: it‟s 3.45. No, it isn‟t. 4. Asks some students to try this in front of the class. 5. Puts students in groups of 4/5. 6. Students in each group take it in turns to be a human clock. They asks other group members questions. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Human Clock‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

Play the game.

161

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson B: I can do it! – I think I can fly!

Whole class responds.

1. Points to the picture. 2. Asks students: whose family is it? (Linda) who is the father? Who is this? Who is the sister? 3. Asks students: what can her brother do? 4. Students work in pairs. 5. Students take it in turns to guess what each of the family members can / can‟t do. 6. Gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in

Look at the picture. Respond.

Work in pairs. Take turns to guess.

1. Tells students to read the text quickly. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners. 4. Asks Did you guess right?

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students read for the big idea

Read the text quickly.

Compare answers.

1. Tells students to read the sentences and answer Yes, he/she can. No, he/she can‟t do. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Asks students to compare their answers with their partners/groups. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students read for the answers

Read the sentences & answer.

Compare answers.

Check answers.

1. Puts students into groups of 3/4. 2. Students ask and answer questions (e.g. Can you ride a bike?). 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Speaking

Work in groups of 4/5. Ask & answer questions.

1. Tells students to copy the table in their notebooks. 2. Students complete the table in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions 4. Gives a time limit of 10 mins. 5. Writes this on the board: In my

Activity 5: (15 mins) Writing

Copy the table in notebooks.

Complete the table.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

162

7. 8. 9.

group, _____ people can ride a bike. Asks some students: how many students in your group can ride a bike? Writes the number on the board. Tells students to complete the sentences in their notebooks. Gives a time limit of 5 mins.

1. Students make a bar graph of their results. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

1. Asks some students to talk about their pictures / charts.

1. Tells students to write about what they think they can / can‟t do next month. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 16 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Complete the sentences.

Make a bar graph.

Talk about their pictures / charts.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Writing

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

163

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 6: My life after school Unit 16: I can do it! Lesson C: I can do it! – Avorng can speak English! Pages: 102-103 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what you can and cannot do. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they can and cannot do through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Step II: 1. Asks students what they can / Warmer/Review (12 mins) can‟t do. Writes the words on the Warmer: „DIY Bingo!‟ board. (e.g. ride a bike, run, draw, jump, etc.). 2. Writes about 12-15 words. Help students remember the words by acting, if necessary. 3. Draws this grid on the board. Students copy the grid.

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

4. Tells students to choose 9 words from the board. They write the words into their grids. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

164

5. One student chooses a word from his/her grid and calls it out. 6. She/He can cross out the word. 7. Other students who have the word in their grids also cross out the word. 8. Another student chooses a word from his/her grid. Repeat step 57. 9. The first student to cross out ALL the words in his/her grid is the winner and shouts “Bingo!”

Play the game.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (33 mins) Lesson C: I can do it! – Avorng can speak English!

Whole class responds.

1. Tells students that they are going to play a game to find treasure. 2. Briefly talk about what treasure is. What treasures do they like (e.g. money, house and lot, gold, diamond, etc.)? 3. Tells students that they need some things to find the treasure. They choose from the list in the book. 4. Tells students to choose what they can do. They choose from the list in the book. 5. In pairs, students talk about what they‟ve got and what they can do. 6. Puts students into groups of 4/5. 7. Each student uses a counter (this can be any small objects they can find, e.g. pen, caps, erasers, small pieces of paper). 8. Use dice to play the game. If there are no dice, 2 students in the group do rock, scissors and paper. Whoever wins chooses a number between 1&6 for the next player. 9. Asks instruction checking questions.

Activity 1: (15 mins) Speaking – Treasure hunt

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

1. Students work in pairs. 2. Student A is the reader. Student B is the listener. 3. Student A reads the text on page 232.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Listen and correct

Work in pairs. Student A is the reader & student B is the listener. Student A reads on page 232.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

165

4. Student B reads and listens. Student B looks for the mistakes in the text on page 103. 5. Students check their answers. 1. Students draw the pet. They use clues from the text. 2. Shows some of the best pictures in class.

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about what their brother / sister can / can‟t do. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 17 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Student B listens & looks for the mistakes on page 103.

Check answers.

Draw a pet.

Look at some pets.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner.

Show the class the feeling.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Activity 3: (8 min) Drawing

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins) I can say what I can do. I can say what I can‟t do. I can ask what people can and cannot do. I can listen for mistakes.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

166

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 6: My life after school Unit 17: It‟s my time! Lesson A: It‟s my time! – I listen to music Pages: 104-105 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what you and other people do in their leisure time. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they and other people do in their leisure time through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

1. Greets the whole class: -

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

Good morning everyone!

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

5. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

6. Whole class/individual responds:

Step II: Warmer/Review (12 mins) Warmer: „Disappearing an elephant‟

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

167

Play the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) Lesson A: It‟s my time! – I listen to music

Whole class responds.

1. Tells students to look at the pictures of Bopha and Sophal‟s room. 2. Tells students to guess who does what using the pictures as clues in pairs. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Collect some ideas from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in and students guess

Look at the pictures.

Guess.

Share ideas.

1. Tells students to listen and check if their guesses were right. Asks Did you guess right? 2. Tells students to listen again and find the clues in the picture. 3. Stops recording after each sentence. 4. Asks some students to point where the clues are in the picture. 5. Tells students to listen again and repeat. Tells them to point to the clues in the picture as they listen.

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Listen & check.

Listen again & find the clues.

Point to where the clues are in the picture.

Listen & repeat.

1. Tells students to work in pairs and tells each other what they do, using vocabulary. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 3: (5 min) Speaking

Work in pairs to tell each other what they do.

1. Tells students to complete the exercises in the grammar box. 2. Asks questions to help students (e.g. Do you we use „s‟ with „you‟?). 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Grammar box

Complete the exercises in the grammar box.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

168

4. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners/groups. 5. Checks answers as a class. 1. Writes one sentence on the board that is true about one member of your family (e.g. My sister walks the dog.). 2. Writes one more sentence that is not true about this member of your family (e.g. She plays football.). 3. Tells students to guess which is right and wrong. 4. Have a class vote. How many students think your sister walks the dog? How many students think she plays football? Writes the number on the board. 5. Tells students which is right and wrong. 6. Tells students that they are going to do the same. They will write true and not true sentences about a member of their family. 7. Asks instruction checking questions. Gives a 5 mins limit.

Activity 5: (7 mins) Writing

Compare answers.

Check answers.

Look at the sentences on the board.

Think & guess.

Have a class vote!

Get the real answer.

Do the same!

1. Puts students in groups of 5/6. 2. Tells students to take it in turns to read their sentences. Other students say “Yes, that‟s right” or “No, that‟s not right”. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 5 mins limit.

Activity 6: (8 mins) Guessing game – speaking

Work in groups of 5/6. Take turns to read their sentences & other say „Yes, that‟s right or No, that‟s not right‟.

1. Tells students to work in pairs. 2. Tells students to ask and answer questions. 3. Tells students to complete the table in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 7: (10 mins) Speaking and writing

Work in pairs. Ask & answer.

Complete the table.

Tell what they do after school/on the weekend.

Tell what their friends do after school/on the weekend.

1. Asks some students to tell you what they do after school/on the weekend. 2. Asks some students to tell you what their friends do after school/on the weekend. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

169

1. Tells students to write about what they usually do in the free time. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 17 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

170

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 6: My life after school Unit 17: It‟s my time! Lesson B: It‟s my time! – I do nothing Pages: 106-107 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what you and other people do in their leisure time. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they and other people do in their leisure time through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes 5 sentences on a piece of paper (e.g. Dara can play the guitar, She can sig a song, He writes a diary, etc.). 2. Puts students into groups. 3. The teams stand at one end of the classroom. 4. Puts the piece of paper with the sentences at the other end of the classroom. 5. One student from each team WALKS as fast as possible to the paper, memorises a sentence, returns to his/her team, and say the sentence. Do not let them Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (12 mins) Warmer: „Walking dictation‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher! Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

171

run! 6. One student from each team writes the sentence. 7. Another student from each team takes their turn to walk to the paper, memorise a sentence and say the sentence in their teams. 8. Continue until one of the teams has completed writing all the sentences.

Play the game.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (28 mins) Lesson B: It‟s my time! – I do nothing

Whole class responds.

1. Points to the picture of Mr. Sovann. 2. Asks students if they remember who he is (the school principal). 3. Asks: What does he do when he isn‟t at school? 4. Tells students to guess with their partner. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Lead in and students guess

Look at the picture of Mr. Sovann. Answer.

Answer.

Guess.

1. Tells students that they are going to read about what Dara and Pisey 2. Tells students to read quickly. It doesn‟t matter if they don‟t understand every word. They only need to understand the main idea. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students read for the big idea

Listen carefully.

Read.

1. Tells students to read the sentences and write the names. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Check answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students read for the answers

Read the sentences & write the names.

Check answers.

1. Says a sentence (e.g. I play football). 2. Have another student say your sentence and add his/her own sentence (e.g. Teacher Mom plays football, Sophal draws

Activity 4: (7 mins) Game – sentence relay

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

172

5. 6. 7.

cartoons and I go for a walk). Tells students they are going to play the same game in their big groups. Tells them they can‟t write. They have to remember the sentences without writing. Puts students into 2 big groups. Puts them in a circle. Students take turns to say a sentence, one sentence building from the other, until the last student has said everybody‟s sentence.

Play the game.

Work with a partner.

Student A turn to page 232 & student B turns to page 238.

Ask & answer.

Tick the correct columns.

Answer.

Use timetable to write about Dara & Sophal.

Tell what Dara & Sophal do.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells student A to turn to page 232. Tells student B to turn to page 238. Tells them not to look at each other‟s timetable. 3. Tells them to ask and answer questions about Dara and Sophal‟s timetable. 4. Tells them to tick the correct columns. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 6. Asks some questions about the timetable.

Activity 5: (3 mins) Speaking

1. Tells students to use the timetable to write about Dara and Sophal. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Writing

Asks some students to tell you what Dara and Sophal do.

1. Tells students to write about what they usually do in the free time. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 17 on page 207 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

173

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

174

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 6: My life after school Unit 17: It‟s my time! Lesson C: It‟s my time! – We play games Pages: 108-109 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what you and other people do in their leisure time. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they and other people do in their leisure time through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes a letter on the board (e.g. h). 2. Tells students to think of words that start with the letter written on the board (e.g. house, hat, high, etc.) 3. Writes the words on the board as students call them out. 4. Puts students into groups of 4/5. 5. Write another letter on the board. 6. Students write down words beginning with the letter on the board in their notebooks. 7. Assign a „writer‟ in each team. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Beginning letter‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher! Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

175

8. Gives a time limit of 30 seconds per letter. 9. The team with the most words wins.

Play the game.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson C: It‟s my time! – We play games

Whole class responds.

1. Tells students they are going to play a game of snakes and ladders. 2. Draws a snake and a ladder on the board. 3. Tells students that snake means „go down‟ and ladder means „go up‟. 4. Puts students in groups of 3/4. 5. Each student uses a counter. 6. Use dice to play the game. If there are no dice, two students in the group do rock, scissors and paper. Whoever wins chooses a number between 1 &6 for the next player. 7. Asks instruction checking questions. 8. Stops the students after 13 mins.

Activity 1: (15 mins) Speaking – snakes and ladders

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

1. Writes some free time activities on the board (e.g. collect stickers, play football, play the guitar). 2. Asks some students which of these 3 they like best. 3. Number it 1. 4. Asks some students which they like next. Number it 2. 5. Asks some students which they like last. Number it 3. 6. Tells students they are going to write 5 free time activities. 7. Number 1 is the one they like best, number 5 is the one they like the last / they don‟t like. 8. Tells students to write in their notebooks. 9. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Writing

Look at the board.

Respond.

Writes 5 free time activities.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

176

1. Tells students to work in pairs. 2. Tells students to take it in turns to ask and answer questions about their partners. 3. Tells them to write their classmate‟s answers in their notebooks in the right order. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 3: (10 min) Speaking and writing

1. Tells students to swap notebooks. 2. Tells students to look at the checklist in their books. 3. Tells students to answer yes or no, then collect their partner‟s mistakes in their partner‟s sentences. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Peer correction

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins) I can talk about what I do in my free time. I can ask about what my friends do in their free time. I can find and check for mistakes in the sentences.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Tells students to write about why Homework: they like playing games. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 18 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Work in pairs. Ask & answer.

Write answers in notebooks.

Swap the notebook.

Look at the checklist.

Answer yes or no & collect their partner‟s mistakes.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner.

Show the feeling.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

177

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 6: My life after school Unit 18: I like my friends! Lesson A: I like my friends! – What do you like? Pages: 110-111 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about activities you and your friends like and don‟t like. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce activities they and their friends like and don‟t like through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes 3 numbers on the board about you (e.g. 3 – you have 3 sisters, 2- speak 2 languages, 4 – you have 4 children). 2. Tells students about the first number. Asks: what number is it? (3). Yes, that‟s right. 3. I have 3 sisters. 3. Lets students guess what the other numbers are about in pairs/groups. 4. You can tell them what the numbers are, or say it‟s a secret for now. They can ask you just before the class ends. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Number and me!‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher! Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

178

5. Puts students into groups of 5/6. 6. Tells students they are going to play the same game in their small groups. 7. Each student writes 5 numbers about him/her. 8. Students take it turns to guess what their group mates‟ numbers are. 9. Students answer with yes, that‟s right/no, that‟s not right.

Play the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson A: I like my friends! – What do you like?

Whole class responds.

1. Tells students to look at the pictures and talk to their partners. Do they know the words? students guess. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Tells students to listen and check. 4. Tells students to listen and repeat. 5. Tells students to work with a partner. 6. In pairs, students look for the words in the picture. 7. Tells students to match the words with the pictures. 8. Tells students to listen and check. 9. Tells students to listen and repeat.

Activity 1: (5 mins) New words

Look at the pictures & talk to their partners.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Look for the words in the picture. Match the words with the pictures. Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

1. Tells students to close their books and look at the board. 2. Writes 3 words on the board from activity 1(e.g. camping, rollerblading, playing football). 3. Says: I like hiking. 4. Draws a smiley face beside I like hiking. 5. Says: I don‟t like rollerblading. 6. Draws a sad face beside I don‟t like rollerblading.

Lead in: (5 mins)

Close the books & look at the board.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

179

1. Tells students to open their books. 2. Tells students to look at the picture of teacher Mom. Who is she? Can they remember? 3. Tells students to guess what teacher Mom likes/doesn‟t like. 4. In pairs, students put a smiley or sad face beside the words in activity 1. They can also write their answers in their notebooks. 5. Gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students guess

Open the books.

Look at the picture of teacher Mom.

Guess.

Work in pairs.

1. Tells students to listen and check their guesses. 2. Asks: How many of your guesses were right?

Activity 3: (3 min) Students listen for the big idea

Listen & check.

1. Tells students to look at the pictures. What are they? 2. Tells students to listen again and draw a smiley or sad face. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

Look at the pictures & answers.

Listen & draw.

Check answers.

1. Tells students to look at the words & pictures in activity 1. 2. Which do they like? Which don‟t they like? 3. Tells students to write numbers 1-8 in their notebooks. 4. Tell them to draw a smiley or sad face next to each number. 5. Lets students work in pairs. 6. In pairs, students ask and answer questions. 7. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Speaking

Look at the words & pictures.

Write 1-8 in notebooks.

Draw.

Ask & answer.

1. Tells students to writes 5 sentences about themselves – what they like and don‟t like (e.g. I like ice-cream) 2. Students write a piece of paper. Do not let them write in their notebooks. 3. Gives students 5 mins. 4. Then collect all the pieces of paper. 5. Tells students you are going to give them paper, but it‟s not their paper. 6. Gives students paper, if they get

Activity 6: (15 mins) Writing and speaking

Write 5 sentences about themselves.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

180

their own paper, tells students to let you know who can change their paper. 7. Tells students that they need to find the person whose paper they have. 8. Tells students to find the person who wrote on the paper by asking questions. 9. Students go around and ask. Tells students not to show the paper they‟re holding when asking questions. 10. When students find the right person, they sit down.

1. Asks some students what they like.

1. Tells students to write about what they like/don‟t like. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 18 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Tell what they like.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

181

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 6: My life after school Unit 18: I like my friends! Lesson B: I like my friends! – Who likes sleeping? Pages: 112-113 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about activities you and your friends like and don‟t like. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce activities they and their friends like and don‟t like through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students in to 3 teams. 2. Puts a chair in front of the whiteboard. 3. One student from team A comes and sits on the chair. He/She must not look at the board. 4. Writes a word on the board (e.g. pencil, school, football, bag, badminton). 5. Other students from team A act out the word. They mustn‟t talk. 6. The student in front of the board must guess the word. The other teams cannot guess. They have to wait for their turn. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Back to the board‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

182

7. Gives a time limit of 30 seconds for each word. 8. When student in front of the board guesses correctly, the team gets a point. 9. Continues playing with the other teams, writing a different word each time. 10. The team with the most number of points at the end of the game wins.

Play the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson B: I like my friends! – Who likes sleeping?

Whole class responds.

1. Tells students to look at the pictures of the characters. 2. Asks: Who are they? What do they like? What don‟t they like? 3. In pairs, students guess what the characters like and don‟t like. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Asks some students to tell you their guesses.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in and students guess

Look at the pictures of the characters. Answers.

Guess.

Tells their guesses.

1. Tells students to read the text quickly. They don‟t have to understand ALL the words. 2. Gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Asks: Did you guess right?

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students read for the big idea

Read the text.

1. Tells students to read again and answer the questions in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners/groups. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students read for the answers

Listen & answer.

Compare answers.

Check answers.

1. Tells students to complete the exercises in the grammar box. 2. Lets students guess / think about the rules. 3. Asks question to help students (e.g. Do we use „s‟ with „you‟?) 4. Asks instruction checking

Activity 4: (10 mins) Grammar box

Complete the exercises.

Think/guess the rules.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

183

questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins. 5. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners/groups. 6. Checks answers as a class. 1. Tells students to choose 3 words from today‟s lesson. 2. Tells students to add 2 more words (e.g. egg, red, blue, pencil, etc.) 3. Tells students draw a table in their notebooks, similar to the example. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. Tells students to go around. They ask and answer the questions. 6. Tells students they can only ask 2 questions for 1 student. 7. Students complete their tables. 8. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Speaking and writing

1. Tells students write about their classmates in their notebooks. 2. They use the information in their tables to write. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Writing

1. Asks some students what their friends like/don‟t like.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins) Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

1. Tells students to write about what their parents like/don‟t like. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 18 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Compare answers.

Check answers.

Choose 3 words from today‟s lesson. Add 2 more words.

Draw a table.

Ask & answer.

Complete the table.

Write about their classmates.

Use the information in the tables to write.

Tell what their friends like/don‟t like.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

184

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

185

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 6: My life after school Unit 18: I like my friends! Lesson C: I like my friends! – I think he likes my food! Pages: 114-115 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about activities you and your friends like and don‟t like. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce activities they and their friends like and don‟t like through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Step II: Writes one sentence on the board Warmer/Review (7 mins) that is true about you (e.g. I like Warmer: „Tell me the truth‟ going for a walk). Students guess if this is true or not true. Asks questions (e.g. Is this right? Do you like going for a walk?). Writes another sentence that is not true about you (e.g. I have 10 sisters and 5 brothers). Students guess if this is true or not. Asks questions (Is this right? Do I have 10 sisters and 5 brothers?) Tells students they are going to

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

186

play the same game. 6. Puts students into groups 5/6. 7. Each group writes 3 sentences about students from the other teams. They cannot write about their group mates. 8. Students in each group take it in turns to read their sentences, one at a time. 9. The student being referred to say yes, that‟s right or no, that‟s not right. 10. Tells students that the game is about the truth. They should tell the truth and be honest to make the game work. 11. Gives points for groups that wrote correct sentences about their classmates.

Play the game.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson C: I like my friends! – I think he likes my food!

Whole class responds.

1. Points to the picture of Avorng. 2. Asks: Who is he? What does he like? What does he not like? 3. Tells students to guess what Avorng like and doesn‟t like with their partners. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Asks some students what their guesses are.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in and students guess

Look at the picture of Avorng. Answer.

Guess.

Tell their guesses.

1. Tells students to read the text quickly. 2. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Asks: Who do you think is correct? Dara or Sophal? Why? 4. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners. 5. Collects some ideas from the class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read for the big idea

Read the text.

Respond.

Compare answers.

Share ideas.

1. Tells students to read again and answer the questions in notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Tells students to compare their

Activity 3: (5 min) Students read for the answers

Read & answer.

Compare answers.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

187

answers with their partners/groups. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Check answers.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen for the answers

Listen. Respond. Respond.

1. Asks students about their pets (Do they have pets? What are they? What does it take? What can it do? 2. Tells students they are going to write about their pets. 3. If they do not have pets, they can write about pets they would like to have. 4. Students draws pictures of their pets (or pets they would like to have) if there is enough time. Students can also do this for homework if there isn‟t enough time. 5. Gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Writing

Respond.

Write about their pets.

Draw pictures of pets.

Answers.

1. Puts students in pairs or groups of 3. 2. Tells students to ask and answer questions about their pets. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Speaking

Work in pairs/groups of 3.

Ask & answer.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner.

Show the feeling.

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher. 188

1. Tells students they are going to listen to Avorng. 2. Asks: What does he like? What doesn‟t he like? 3. Ask: Who is correct? Dara or Sophal?

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about what their sister/brother like/don‟t like. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 19 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins) I can talk about what I like. I can talk about what my friends like/don‟t like. I can ask about what my friends like/don‟t like. Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

189

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 7: Celebrations! Unit 19: Guesses tricks and presents! Lesson A: Guesses tricks and presents! – Oh yuck! Pages: 116-117 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing and identifying things around you. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and identify things around them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes ghost house on the board. Asks students if they know what it is. 2. Tells students to guess in their groups. (This is a ride at dreamland in Phnom Penh. You go inside and people scare you.) 3. Gets answers as a class. Tells students that the ghost house is a game you can play in Phnom Penh where people try to scare you!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (4 mins) Lead in

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

Play the game.

190

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) Lesson A: Guesses tricks and presents! â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Oh yuck!

Whole class responds.

1. Tells students that Sophal is trying to scare Linda. 2. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 3. Asks students: What is the trick? What is Sophal doing? 4. Students compare with their partner for a minute. 5. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

Listen carefully.

Look at the picture.

Answer.

Compare ideas.

Share ideas.

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Students listen. 3. Students compare with their partner/group. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Students listen for the big idea: (5 mins)

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare. Check.

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write a-g in their notebooks. Asks students to see if they can remember the things that were said. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Students listen and tick the body parts they hear. 5. Students compare with their partner/group. 6. Ask and answer as a class.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students listen for the answers (recording part 1)

Work with a partner.

Write a-g in notebooks.

Listen & tick.

Compare. Ask & answer.

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write 1-5 in their notebooks. Tells students to try and remember/guess the order. 3. Tells students to listen and write the answers next to the numbers in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students listen. 6. Students compare. 7. Plays the recording again only if

Activity 3: (10 min) Students listen for the answers (recording part 2)

Work with a partner.

Write 1-5 in notebook.

Listen & write answers.

Listen. Compare.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

191

students need. 1. Asks students if they can remember what was said. Tells students to complete with this, that, these and those. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Students compare. 4. Students listen and check. 5. Students listen and repeat.

Activity 4: (5 mins)

1. Tells students you are going to play a guessing game. 2. Models the game with a student. (tells them to close their eyes. Gives them an object that they know the name of. Asks what‟s this? It‟s a pen! 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Game! What‟s this?

1. Points to something in the room and ask students what colour is that? Students: That is ____. Repeat with this, these, that and those. 2. Tells students to play the game in groups 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 6: (5 mins) What colour?

1. Asks questions to the class with this, that, these and those. 2. Ask other students to “play teacher” and do the same. 3. Are students using words correctly?

1. Tells students to write about the presents they gave to their friends. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 19 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Complete with this, that, these and those.

Compare. Listen & check. Listen & repeat.

Listen carefully.

Model the game.

Play the game.

Tell what colour is.

Play the game.

Answer with: this, that, these, those.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins)

192

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

193

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 7: Celebrations! Unit 19: Guesses tricks and presents! Lesson B: Guesses tricks and presents! – That‟s my present! Pages: 118-119 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing and identifying things around you. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and identify things around them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

2. 3.

4. 5.

Good morning everyone!

Step II: Writes some first meeting Warmer/Review (5 mins) vocabulary on the board. E.g. Hi. Warmer: „feeling greetings‟ How are you? How are you? What‟s your name? Tells students to stand up. Tells students that they are going to do a get to know you role play. Have the students do the activity once normally. Tells students to choose a different partner, but this time they have found out that their boyfriend/girlfriend has a different boyfriend/girlfriend!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

Play the game.

194

How do they feel? Tells students to have conversation with this feeling. 1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (44 mins) Lesson B: Guesses tricks and presents! – That‟s my present!

Whole class responds.

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. Asks: What can you see? 2. Asks students How do they fee? 3. Asks students why? 4. Students compare with their partner for 2 mins. 5. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

Look at the picture & cover the text.

Respond.

Work with a partner.

Share ideas.

1. Tells students they are going to read and listen and check their guesses. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students to compare their answers with their partner/group. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Students read and listen for the big idea: (5 mins)

Listen carefully.

Listen & read.

Compare answers.

Check answers.

1. Do the first question together as a class. Have students point to where the answer is in the text. 2. Tells students to do the other questions in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Students complete. 5. Students compare. 6. Checks answers.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

Do the first question.

Do the other questions.

Complete. Compare. Check.

1. Asks students to look at the grammar box. 2. Writes 1. I. asks students which word goes with I. students – My! 3. Tells students to continue answering the questions in their notebooks. If students get stuck, tells them to check the reading. 4. Asks instruction checking

Activity 3: (5 min) Grammar

Look at the grammar box.

Respond.

Answer questions.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

195

questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Ask and answer questions as a class. 1. Tells students to look at the text. Asks What‟s Linda‟s favourite thing? 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students compare with their group/partner. 4. Ask and answer questions as a class.

Activity 4: (3 mins) Model for writing

1. Tells students to answer the question in Activity 5 in their notebook. Tells students to use notes only. Not full sentences. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students compare their answers with their group/partner. 4. Ask and answer questions as a class.

Activity 5: (4 mins) Model for writing

1. Students make notes about their favourite thing. 2. Tells students to use their notes to write about their favourite thing. They can follow the model of Linda‟s writing „My favourite thing‟. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 6 and 7: (10 mins) Writing

1. Tells students to read their sentences out to their group one by one. Can their group guess what their favourite thing is? 2. Asks instruction checking questions.

Activity 8: (5 mins) Guessing game!

1. Asks a couple of students to talk about their favourite things in front of the class. Can the class guess?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Compare.

Ask & answer.

Look at the text & answer.

Compare.

Ask & answer.

Answer.

Compare.

Ask & answer.

Make notes about their favourite thing. Use their notes to write about their favourite thing.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins)

Read their sentences out.

Talk about their favourite things.

196

1. Tells students to write about their favourite things and why. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 19 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

197

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 7: Celebrations! Unit 19: Guesses tricks and presents! Lesson C: Guesses tricks and presents! – A special present Pages: 120-121 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing and identifying things around you. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and identify things around them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Asks students to talk to their group about things people get as presents. Who gives people presents? When do you get presents? 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas. 1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students What is happening? Why is Dara Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (3 mins) Lead in:

Students guess: (3 mins)

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise question if they have any.

Play the game.

Look at the picture.

Answer. 198

smiling? 3. Students compare with their partner. 4. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Compare.

Share ideas.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) Lesson C: Guesses tricks and presents! â&#x20AC;&#x201C; A special present

Whole class responds.

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Students listen. 3. Students compare with their partner/group. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare. Check.

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write 1-7 in their notebooks. Asks students what they can remember. What do you think the present from the cat is? 3. Tells them to listen to cross out the numbers of thing it canâ&#x20AC;&#x;t be. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students listen. 6. Students compare their answers with their group/partner. 7. Asks for some answers as a class.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students listen for the answers

Work with a partner.

Write 1-7 in notebooks.

Cross out.

Listen. Compare.

Share answers.

1. Tells students to talk to their group/partner about anything else they think it could be. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Gets some ideas from the class. Do the ideas match the clues? Have a class talk. (e.g. a cow! No! A cow is bigger than a cat! Socks. No! You can wear socks)

Activity 3: (5 min) Post task

Talk about anything it could be.

Share ideas.

1. Tells students to look at the picture on page 232. Did they guess right?

Activity 4: (2 mins) Confirm guess

Look at the picture on page 232.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

199

1. Tells students to read the riddle in Activity 5. Can they guess what it is? (you can use it at school. It is black. It is smaller than a bird. What is it? A pen!) 2. Tells students to choose one thing. It can be something in the classroom or at home, as long as they know the word in English! 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Tells students to work in group of 4/5 and read their riddles. Can their friend guess?

Activity 5: (10 mins) Write a riddle – preparing for speaking

1. Tells students to look at the picture. Asks students ask a yes no question to try and guess the picture. When students guess the object, tells them how many points they got. 2. Tells students to work with their partner and to play a game! Tells students that they need to ask yes no questions to find out which object they are thinking of. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 6 (10 mins) Game!

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about the presents they want to give to their parents and why. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 20 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Read the riddle in activity 5.

Choose on thing in English word (riddle).

Read their riddles.

Look at the picture & guess.

Work with a partner to ask yes no questions to find out which object they‟re thinking of.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner. Show the feeling.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins) I can talk about my favourite thing. I can play guessing games.

200

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

201

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 7: Celebrations! Unit 20: Festivals, parties and trouble! Lesson A: Festivals, parties and trouble! – Khmer New Year at Angkor Wat Pages: 122-123 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what‟s happening now and what you and your friends are doing now. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what‟s happening now and what they and their friends are doing now through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes: Khmer New Year on the board. 2. Asks students to talk to their group about what they do on Khmer New Year.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (2 mins) Lead in:

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Talk about what they do on Khmer New Year.

202

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (45 mins) Lesson A: Festivals, parties and trouble! â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Khmer New Year at Angkor Wat

Whole class responds.

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students what is happening? 3. Students compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Compare.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work with a partner.

Write 1-7 in notebooks.

Listen & write answers next to the numbers.

Listen. Compare. Share answers.

Complete the exercises.

Think about the rules.

Compare answers.

Answer.

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Students listen. 3. Students compare with their partner/group. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write 1-7 in their notebooks. Tells students to try and remember/guess the order. 3. Tells them to listen and write the answers next to the numbers in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students listen. 6. Students compare. 7. Asks for some answers as a class.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to complete the exercises. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a 5 mins time limit. While students are doing this, starts writing: We are acting on the board. 3. Lets students think about the rules of present continuous. 4. Students compare their answers with their partner. 5. Asks and answers questions as a class. 6. Asks questions to help students:

Activity 3: (7 min) Controlled practice

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

203

Do we use am/is/are +ing to talk about things that are finished or things that are not finished? 1. Have students close their books and stand up. 2. Tells students that they are going to learn: We are acting. 3. Plays the tape and encourage students to join in. 4. Tells students that they are going to sing the song again and this time they will do the actions as well. 5. Plays the song. 6. Tells students that they are going to play a memory game and that you (teacher) are going to erase an action word. When students get to that word, they donâ&#x20AC;&#x;t say the word they do the action only. 7. Erases walking. Sing the song together. Continue with the rest of the words!

Activity 4: (10 mins) Disappearing Chant

1. Chooses one of the pictures in activity 5 and acts it out for the class. Asks: What am I doing? 2. Puts students into groups of 4/5. 3. Tells students they are going to play a guessing game. 4. Rules: if your friends guess, you get 1 point and they get 1 point. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Game! What are you doing?

Asks a few students to act out what they are doing for the class. Can everyone guess? 2. Are students using the present continuous in their guesses.

1. Tells students to write about things they prepare before Khmer New Year Day. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 20 on page 208 in the studentâ&#x20AC;&#x;s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

Guess.

Play the game.

Act out for the class.

Use the present continuous.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher. 204

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

205

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 7: Celebrations! Unit 20: Festivals, parties and trouble! Lesson B: Festivals, parties and trouble! – Is he getting in trouble again? Pages: 124-125 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what‟s happening now and what you and your friends are doing now. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what‟s happening now and what they and their friends are doing now through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. This is an acting game. One student stands in front of the class doing a continuous ing acting. (e.g. fishing) 2. Student 2 comes and asks what are you doing? 3. Student 1 doesn‟t say I am fishing. They say a different ing action. I‟m flying! 4. Student 2 has to do the action student 1 said. (e.g. flying) 5. Student 2 keeps pretending to fly until student 3 asks What are you doing? Student 2 doesn‟t say flying. They say a different ing Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (8 mins) Warmer: Game! What are you doing?

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

206

action. 6. Continues until all students have had a turn. It‟s really funny! (if you have a very large class, just point to some people. )

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson B: Festivals, parties and trouble! – Is he getting in trouble again?

1. Tells students to cover the text and the picture that goes with it and look at the 3 words and the pictures. Drills the words! 2. Tells students today‟s story uses these words. Can they guess the story? 3. Asks instruction checking questions.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. What can they see? 2. Asks: What are you doing? 3. Asks students: What festival do you think they are at? 4. Students compare with their partner. 5. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students they are going to listen and read and check their guesses. 2. Tells students to read along with their fingers. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Plays the recording! 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students read and listen for the big idea

Activity 4: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Cover the text & the picture & look at the 3 words.

Guess the story.

Look at the picture & cover the text.

Respond. Respond.

Compare.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Listen carefully.

Listen & read.

Compare.

Check.

Do the first question as a class.

Do the other questions.

207

of 5 mins. 4. Students complete. *sets up the next activity on the board while they are doing this. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class. 1. (Do this while students are reading for answers in activity 4) draws 3 columns on the board and draws this from the studentsâ&#x20AC;&#x; book on the board. No e! Make-making Have-having

Double letters! Swimswimming Sit- siting

Complete.

Compare.

Check.

Answer.

Draw 3 columns.

Compare.

Share answers.

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Compare.

Share ideas.

Look at the sentence on the board. Write ing sentences about the picture.

Activity 5: (6 mins) Controlled practice

Just add ing! Read- reading Jump-jumping

2. Asks students where you should write the word: write 3. Tells students to draw 3 columns in their notebooks and write the ing words in the columns. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Asks and answers as a class. 1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students: how many words do you know in the picture? 3. Students compare with their partner. 4. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 6: (2 mins) Brainstorming

1. Writes a sentence from the picture on the board. 2. Tells students to work by themselves to write ing sentences about the picture. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins. 4. At the end of the time clap your hands and says Pen down! 5. Students compare with their group.

Activity 7: (9 mins) Game!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Compare.

208

Asks groups who was the winner in their group. 2. Asks about the winning sentences. Calls on both weaker and stronger students. 3. Are student using the correct form of „to be‟?

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Tells students to write about how Homework: they do when they have stress. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 20 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Respond.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

209

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 7: Celebrations! Unit 20: Festivals, parties and trouble! Lesson C: Festivals, parties and trouble! – A beautiful wedding Pages: 126-127 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what‟s happening now and what you and your friends are doing now. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what‟s happening now and what they and their friends are doing now through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells all students to stand up. 2. Puts class into 4 groups. 3. Tells students to decide on a team name. 4. Writes the team names on the board. 5. Have one student from each group go to the board and face the class so they cannot see the board. 6. Writes present continuous words on the board. (e.g. dancing). Tells the students facing the rest of the class Guess the word. They have to look at the actions Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: Game!

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

210

the rest of their group is doing to guess! If no one has guessed it after a minute, tells them to look at the board. Changes the people at the front of the class after each ing word. 7. Rules: the people at the board can talk. The people trying to act and show the word are not allowed to talk. First team to guess gets a point. 8. People who cheat lost a point. 9. Asks instruction checking questions.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (35 mins) Lesson C: Festivals, parties and trouble! â&#x20AC;&#x201C; A beautiful wedding

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students what is happening? Where are they? 3. Tells students: These are people in Sophalâ&#x20AC;&#x;s family. Can you guess who they are? 4. Students compare with their partner for 3 mins. 5. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 1: (4 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Students listen. 3. Students compare with their partner/group. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write a-g in their notebooks. Tells students to try and remember/guess who the people are. 3. Tells them to listen and write the answers next to the letters in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students listen. 6. Students compare.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture.

Answer.

Guess.

Compare.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare. Check.

Work with a partner.

Write a-g in notebooks.

Listen & write the answers next to the letters in notebooks.

Listen. Compare. 211

7. Asks for some answers as a class. 1. Tells students to close their books and look at you. 2. Tells students to work with a partner. Have pairs choose who is student A and who is student B. 3. Tells student A‟s to put up their hands. Tells student B‟s to put up their hands. 4. Tells students that they are going to look at 20 pictures. There are people doing continuous actions in the pictures. They need to ask what is the kid doing? questions to find out which are the same and which are different. (12 are the same & 8 are different). Asks how many the same? How many different? 5. Tells students that they are not allowed to look at the partner‟s picture. They have to ask questions to find the eight differences. 6. Gives a time limit of 10 mins.

Activity 3: (12 min) Free controlled practice

1. Describe a student in the room. (it will be funny if you describe yourself!) you can say what they are wearing and what they are doing. Can the students guess? 2. Tells students to play the same game in group of 4/5. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 4: (4 mins) Free practice

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (4 mins) I can say what I‟m doing. I can say what my friends are doing. I can ask “What are you doing?” questions.

Share answers.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Start their work.

Listen carefully.

Play the game.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner.

Show the feeling.

212

1. Tells students to write about a beautiful wedding. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 21 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

213

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 7: Celebrations! Unit 21: A world of fun Lesson A: A world of fun – The new baby Pages: 128-129 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what is happening now and what usually happens. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what introduce what is happening now and what usually happens through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Writes what I like about you is…on the board. 3. Asks students to help you finish the sentence about you! (e.g. What I like about you is you‟re a good teacher. Or what I like about you is you‟re funny. 4. Tells students that they are going to say nice things about each person in the group for 30 seconds! Students have to finish the sentence „What I like about you is…‟ with something true and good about the person. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer:

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

214

Students then have to guess who the person is. 5. Tells students you (teacher) are going to clap your hands at the end of 30 seconds and they need to change. 6. Asks instruction checking questions.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (47 mins) Lesson A: A world of fun â&#x20AC;&#x201C; The new baby

1. Puts students into groups of 4. 2. Asks: Do you know any babies? What do they do? Tells students to talk to their groups. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 4. Asks some ideas from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students: What is happening? 3. Asks students: Why? 4. Tells students to compare with their partner. 5. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 2: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students listen. 4. Tells students to compare with their partner/group. 5. Check answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to try and remember/guess what Daraâ&#x20AC;&#x;s family members usually do/are doing. 3. Tells students to write 3-10 in their notebooks and to write the information they remember. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit

Activity 3: (10 min) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Work in groups of 4. Talk to their groups.

Share ideas.

Look at the picture & respond.

Respond.

Respond. Compare.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work with a partner.

Remember/guess.

Write 3-10 in notebooks.

215

of 3 mins. 5. Tells students to listen and check. 6. Tells students to compare with their group/partner. 7. Asks and answers questions as a class. 1. Writes 1. Tom usually watch TV on Sunday, today he is go for a walk. Asks: Is that right? Students: no! 2. Corrects your sentence. (1. Tom usually watch TV on Sunday, but today he is going for a walk.) Asks: Is that right? Students: yes! 3. Tells students to write sentences 2-7 in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 5. Tells students to compare their answers with their partner/group. 6. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Controlled practice

1. Talks about an unusual day. Gives examples, e.g. birthday, very big storm, marriage etc. 2. Tells students to use their imagination, tells students to imagine their family is having an unusual Sunday. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 5: (7 mins) Preparing for speaking

1. Tells students to work in groups of 4. 2. Tells students to take it in turns to tell their group about their unusual Sunday. Group members have to listen and ask questions. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Freer practice

Tells some students to tell the class about their unusual Sunday. 2. Are students confident? Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Listen & check.

Compare.

Ask & answer.

Look at the board & respond.

Respond.

Write sentences 2-7 in notebooks.

Compare.

Ask & answer.

Listen carefully.

Imagine on their family having an unusual Sunday.

Work in groups of 4.

Take turns to tell their group about unusual Sunday.

Tell the class about unusual Sunday.

216

1. Tells students to write about a new baby. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 21 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

217

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 7: Celebrations! Unit 21: A world of fun Lesson B: A world of fun – There‟s something about the moon Pages: 130-131 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what is happening now and what usually happens. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what introduce what is happening now and what usually happens through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students to stand up and look at the teacher. 2. Says that you will tell them to do things but they should only do if you say Sok says! 3. There are rules. If a student is too slow they are dead. If students do something, but you didn‟t say Sok says, they are out. 4. If they don‟t do something, but you did say Sok says they are out!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (8 mins) Warmer: „Sok says‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

218

1. Writes: Celebrate! On the board. 2. Asks: What do people celebrate? Gets 1 or 2 ideas from the class. 3. Tells students to keep talking about things people celebrate with their groups. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Gets answers from the class.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Lead in: (3 mins) Brainstorming

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (32 mins) Lesson B: A world of fun â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Thereâ&#x20AC;&#x;s something about the moon

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. What can you see? 2. Asks students: what can you see in the pictures? 3. Asks students: What are they celebrating? 4. Tells students to compare with their partner for 3 mins. 5. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and read and check their guesses. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Plays the recording! 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Students compare their answers with their group/partner. 6. Checks the answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Where is Dhashi from? Students: Malaysia! Continues with the rest of the questions about Dhashi! 2. Tells students to answer the rest of the questions in their notebooks. Tells students to make notes. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Tells students to compare with

Activity 3: (5 min) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Look at the board. Respond.

Talk.

Share ideas.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture and cover the text.

Respond.

Compare.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen & read.

Compare.

Check.

Respond.

Answer.

Compare. 219

their group/partner. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Check.

Listen carefully.

Play game.

Listen carefully & choose a celebration.

Make notes about celebration.

Describe a festival.

Listen to the Model!

Do the same thing (festival).

Describe their festival.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

1. Tells students that you are imagining you are one of the children. Tells students to ask yes/no ing questions and guess who you are! 2. Tells students to play the same game with their partner. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Stirrer â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Guess Who!

1. Tells students to choose a celebration or party (e.g. weddingâ&#x20AC;Ś) 2. Tells students to make notes only about their celebration in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Students prepare to speak

1. Tells students they are going to describe their festival to their group. Tells students not to say which festival it is. Tells students that you like good descriptions and creativity! 2. Model! The activity. Tells students to close their eyes and try to see what you are describing. Describes a festival. Can students guess? 3. Tells students to do the same thing in their group. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 6: (7 mins) Freer speaking practice

1. Asks some students to describe their festival for the class. Can the class guess?

1. Tells students to write about a festival they like. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 21 on page 208 in the studentâ&#x20AC;&#x;s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Say goodbye to the teacher. 220

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

221

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 7: Celebrations! Unit 21: A world of fun Lesson C: A world of fun – What‟s happening? Pages: 132-133 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what is happening now and what usually happens. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what introduce what is happening now and what usually happens through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes What are you doing? On the board. 2. Tells students that they are going to play an acting game! It‟s called “What are you doing?” 3. Tells one student at a time stands in front of the class and does a continuous –ing action and they can‟t stop until someone asks them “What are you doing?”. 4. Model! Do a continuous action. (e.g. fishing.) Pretend to be fishing. Says to students you keep going and keep going until someone says? Students: What Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (6 mins) Warmer: „What are you doing?‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

222

are you doing? Say: yes! But the person doesn‟t say fishing. They say a different action. (e.g. jumping). 5. Start jumping! Says you keep going and keeping going until someone says? Students: What are you doing? Say: yes! Does the person say jumping? Students: no! They say a different action! 6. Asks instruction checking questions.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson C: A world of fun – What‟s happening?

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. What can you see? 2. Asks students: what is everyone doing? Why? 3. Students compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Asks: Is Mr. Sovann in his office? Students: no! tells students to point to where the answer is in the text. 2. Tells students to answer the rest of the questions in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Students compare with their

Activity 3: (7 min) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture and cover the text.

Respond.

Compare.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen & read.

Compare.

Check.

Respond.

Answer the other questions.

Compare. 223

group/partner. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Check.

Respond.

Correct 4 of the rest of the questions.

Compare.

Check.

Look at the first picture & answer.

Look at the rest of the cartoons & talk about Neath.

Talk about 2-3 of the pictures.

1. Asks: Is Mr. Sovann in his office? Students: no! says: Where is Mr. Sovann? Students: Mr. Sovann is watching the egg. 2. Writes: Mr. Sovann isn‟t in his office. He‟s watching the egg. 3. Tells students to correct 4 of the rest of the questions (write long answers) in their notebooks. They can choose any 4 questions they like. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. Tells students to compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Students read for the answers

1. Tells students to look at the first picture. Asks: what should she be doing? Students: She should be doing homework. Asks: Is she doing homework? Students: No, she isn‟t doing homework. Asks: What is she doing? Students: She‟s playing football. 2. Tells students to look at the rest of the cartoons with their partner and talk about Neath. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Talks about 2 or 3 of the picture as a class (you don‟t have to do them all!).

Activity 5: (5 mins) Looking at the model

1. Tells students to make their own cartoon. Tells students to follow the example in activity 5. Tells students to draw 2-3 pictures. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 6: (7 mins) Personalization

Make their own cartoon.

1. Puts students in groups of 4/5. 2. Tells students they are going to play a guessing game with the pictures. 3. Tells students to take it in turns to ask –ing questions and make

Activity 7: (7 mins) Speaking

Work in groups of 4/5. Listen carefully.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

224

negative statements about the pictures. They get 1 point for ever right guessing using the right grammar. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a patner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about what‟s happening today? 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 22 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Play the game.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner. Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins) I can talk about what usually happen. I can say what people aren‟t doing. I can ask questions about what people aren‟t doing.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

225

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country. Unit 22: Cool things in my country. Lesson A: Cool things in my country – What animal is it? Pages: 134-135 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Asking and responding to questions. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask & respond to questions through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes some first meeting vocabulary on the board. E.g. Hi. How are you? What‟s your name? 2. Tells students to stand up. 3. Tells students that they are going to do a get to know you role play. They greet each other as if they are meeting for the first time. 4. Stops after 30 seconds. 5. Tells students to choose a different partner, but this time they have just found out their sister/brother spent/stole all Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Feeling greetings‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

226

his/her money. Asks: How do you feel? (angry!) tells students to have the conversation with this feeling (angry). 6. Stops after 30 seconds and change the situation again. Tells students to change partners too. Students have the conversation with different feelings. E.g. your dog is dead (sad). You have a million dollars (happy). You scored 100% in your test! (happy, surprise). You are going to the USA (or any other country) on holiday (happy, excited). 1. Asks students their favourite animals. What other animals do they know? 2. Puts students in pairs. Students talk about animals they like and donâ&#x20AC;&#x;t like. 3. Gives a time limit of 1 min.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Lead in: (3 mins)

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson A: Cool things in my country â&#x20AC;&#x201C; What animal is it?

1. Tells students to look at the photos of animals in Activity 1. 2. Asks: Which of these animals do you know? 3. Tells students to match the photos with words in their notebooks. 4. Tells students to compare with their partners. 5. Tells students to listen and check. 6. Tells students to listen and repeat.

Activity 1: (5 mins) New words

1. Tells students that some of these animals live with people. Some live in the forest and seas. 2. Asks students to copy the table in their notebooks quickly. 3. Tells students to work in pairs. They complete the table. 4. Tells students to listen and check.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Categorizing

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Respond.

Talk about animals they like/ donâ&#x20AC;&#x;t like.

Whole class responds.

Look at the photos.

Respond.

Match the photos with words.

Compare.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Listen carefully.

Copy the table in their notebooks. Work in pairs & Complete.

Listen & check. 227

1. Tells students they are going to listen about animals. 2. One is NOT an animal. Can they guess? What number? Who is he? 3. Tells students to listen and guess. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (3 min) Students listen for the big idea

Listen carefully.

Guess.

Listen & guess.

Check.

Listen & match.

Write answers in notebooks.

Check.

Complete the exercises.

Think about the rules.

Check.

Respond.

Answer about their favourite animals.

Draw their favourite animals.

1. Tells students to listen again and match the questions with the answers. 2. Students write answers in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to complete the exercises in the grammar box in their notebooks. 2. Tells students to think about the rules. 3. Gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 5: (7 mins) Grammar box

1. Asks some students about their favourite animals (e.g. What does it eat?) 2. Tells students they are going to answer questions about their favourite animals in their notebooks. 3. If time, students draw their favourite animals. Sets this for homework if there isnâ&#x20AC;&#x;t enough time.

Activity 6: (8 mins) Writing

1. Tells students to work in pairs. 2. Tells students to ask and answer questions about their favourite animals.

Activity 7: (3 mins) Speaking

Work in pairs. Ask & answer about their favourite animals.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins)

Show some completed pictures of their favourite animals. Listen & think.

1. Shows some completed pictures of their favourite animals. 2. Tells students that some of the animals are endangered. They are about to die and we will not see them ever again.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

228

1. Tells students to think of the ways to help endangered animals. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 22 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

229

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country. Unit 22: Cool things in my country. Lesson B: Cool things in my country – Life on the water Pages: 136-137 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Asking and responding to questions. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask & respond to questions through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students into 2-3 groups. 2. Have the groups stand in a line or sit in a circle. 3. The student at the back of the line starts. If students are seated in a circle, chooses one student to start the game off. 4. Shows the students at the end of the line a number (e.g. 70). 5. The students run to their lines and write the number on the back of the student in front of them with their finger. 6. When the student knows what the number is, he/she can write Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (8 mins) Warmer: „Number, draw, race!‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

230

the number on the next students back. 7. Continues until the student at the front of the line knows the number. The student shouts it out or writes it on the board. 8. The first team to shout out / write the correct number on the board wins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson B: Cool things in my country â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Life on the water

1. Shows students the photo of a floating village in Activity 1. 2. Tells students that this is photo of a floating village. What do they know about floating village? 3. Asks questions (e.g. What is it? Who lives here? Would you like to live here? Why?).

Activity 1: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students to read the text quickly. 2. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Asks: Does Panha like the floating village? Would you like to line in a floating village? Why? 5. Asks some students to share their ideas in class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read for the big idea

1. Tells students to answer the questions. They write answers in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Gives a time limit of 7 mins. 4. Students compare answers with their partners. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students read for the answers

1. Tells students they are going to write questions about their best friend. 2. Students complete the questions and write choices in their notebooks.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Writing

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the photo.

Listen carefully.

Respond.

Read the text.

Respond.

Share ideas.

Answer the questions.

Compare.

Check.

Listen carefully.

Complete & write.

231

3. Tells students they should NOT write the answers and they should NOT write their best friend‟s name. 4. Students write questions in their notebooks. 5. Asks instruction checking questions. 6. Gives a time limit of 9 mins. 1. Students work in pairs. To make this activity more exciting, you might want to pair students up such that they work with someone they don‟t usually work with. 2. A student start by reading his/her quiz questions to his/her partner. 3. She/He puts a tick as his/her partner answers the questions. 4. Students swap roles. 5. When both students have finished asking and answering questions, they count the number of correct questions their partner got. Did they guess right?

Asks: how many of your answers were correct? 2. Asks students to guess what your answers would be for the quiz questions.

1. Tells students to answer: „Do you want to live in a floating village?‟ why or why not? 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 22 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

NOT to write answers & their best friend‟s name.

Write questions.

Work in pairs.

Read his/her quiz to partner.

Put a tick as his/her partner answer. Swap roles. Guess.

Respond.

Guess.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Speaking

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

232

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country. Unit 22: Cool things in my country. Lesson C: Cool things in my country – Where is it? Pages: 138-139 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Asking and responding to questions. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask & respond to questions through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes a word on the board (e.g. small). 2. Asks: what small things can you think of? (e.g. pencil, pen, rat, paper). Accepts all possible answers. 3. Tells students they are going to play the same game in groups. 4. Puts students in groups of 5/6. 5. Assigns a writer in each group. 6. Asks a question / writes on the board (e.g. red, square, bigger than the teacher, yellow). 7. In groups, students write down as many things they can think of Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „How many things can you think of that…?‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

233

that are red, square, bigger than the teacher, yellow, etc. 8. Gives a time limit of 1 minute for each word or phrase. 9. The group with the most number of words wins. Accepts words that are spelt wrong. 1. Writes Cambodia on the board. 2. Asks students what they know about their country / Cambodia. 3. Asks: Wh- questions (e.g. Where is Angkor Wat? What do you like about Cambodia?)

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Lead in: (3 mins)

Play the game.

Look at the board. Respond.

Respond.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (35 mins) Lesson B: Cool things in my country – Where is it?

1. Tells students they are going to answer questions about Cambodia. 2. Tells them to guess the answers if they don‟t know. 3. Puts students in groups of 5/6. 4. Assigns a writer in each team. The writer writes the answers in his/her notebook. 5. Students answer the questions about Cambodia. 6. Gives a time limit of 8 mins. 7. Students listen and check their answers.

Activity 1: (12 mins) Cambodia quiz

1. Students work in the same groups. 2. Tells students they are going to write more questions about Cambodia. 3. Students write 3 quiz questions. They must know the answers to the questions they write! 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Writing – more quiz questions

1. Tells students that they are going to read their questions to the other groups. 2. Assigns a reader and a writer in each team. 3. The reader read the questions

Activity 3: (13 min) Speaking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully.

Guess.

Answer about Cambodia.

Listen & check.

Work in groups.

Write more questions about Cambodia.

Write 3 quiz questions.

Listen carefully.

Assign the reader & the writer.

The reader read the questions. 234

and choices one by one. 4. Each group has 30 seconds to shout out their answers. If other groups have not given an answer after 30 seconds, the reading group wins and gets a point. 5. The writer adds extra points on the board. 6. Continues until all 3 questions have been asked, then calls on other groups.

Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students write about their country / Cambodia. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 23 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins) I can ask questions about people, places, animals and things. I can answer questions about people, places, animals and things. I can write questions about my country.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner. Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

235

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country. Unit 23: My cool house Lesson A: My cool house – Where are my things? Pages: 140-141 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your house. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their house through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students to stand up. 2. Tells them to close their eyes or cover them with their hands. No cheating / peeping! 3. Asks some questions about the classroom (e.g. how many chairs are in the classroom? How many windows?) 4. Tells students to put up their hands if they want to answer. 5. The student who answers right sits down. 6. Asks questions quickly.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Classroom quiz‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

236

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson A: My cool house â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Where are my things?

1. Tells students to look at the photos in activity 1. 2. Points to a picture (e.g. bedroom). Says: I sleep here. 3. Puts students in pairs. 4. Tells them to talk about what they do in each part of the house. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 6. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in

1. Asks some students if they know what the photos are. 2. Tells students to number the photos in their notebooks. Tells them to guess and talk to their partner. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 4. Students listen and check. 5. Students listen and repeat.

Activity 2: (5 mins) New words

1. Tells students that they are going to listen to Dara. 2. Tells students that Dara is preparing for school. Asks: Is it a bad day or a good day for Dara? 3. Plays the recording. 4. Gets some ideas from students.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to listen again and number the pictures in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their classmates. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to complete the exercises in the grammar box. 2. Lets students to think about the rules. 3. Asks questions to help students.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Grammar box

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully.

Look at the picture.

Work in pairs. Talk about what they do in each part of the house.

Share answers.

Respond.

Number the photos & guess & talk.

Listen & check. Listen & repeat.

Listen carefully.

Respond.

Listen. Share ideas.

Listen & number the pictures.

Compare.

Check.

Complete the exercises.

Think about the rules.

237

4. Gives a time limit of 7 mins. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Check.

Copy the drawing in activity 5.

Listen & draw.

Answer about Cambodia.

Compare their drawing.

Ask & answer.

Listen carefully.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

1. Tells students to copy the drawing in the activity 5 in their notebooks. 2. Tells them to listen and draw. 3. Gives a time limit of 30 seconds for each sentence. 4. Reads these sentences out loud, one by one. Reads each sentence 2-3 times. „Draw a box. Draw a ball in the box. Draw a pencil next to the box. Draw a notebook next to the box. Draw an apple on the notebook.‟

Activity 6: (7 mins) Listen and drawing

1. Tells students to compare their drawing. Are they the same or different? 2. Tells them to ask and answer questions (e.g. where is the ball?) 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 7: (4 mins) Speaking

1. Shows some good examples of drawings in activity 7. Tells students that their success in this activity depends on their ability to listen well. They can‟t do this by listening and talking at the same time.

1. Tells students to draw about their house. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 23 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

238

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country. Unit 23: My cool house Lesson B: My cool house – Big houses, small houses Pages: 142-143 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your house. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their house through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students to look at the photos in activity 1. 2. Asks students if they have seen houses like these before. Where? Which of the 2 houses would they like to live in? 3. Tells students to work with their partners and answer the questions. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Gets ideas from students. Accept all answers! Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Activity 1: Lead in

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Look at the photos.

Respond.

Work with a partner & answer.

Share ideas.

239

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson B: My cool house – Big houses, small houses

1. Tells students to read the text quickly. They don‟t need to understand all the words. 2. Tells students to match the texts with the photos. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Checks answers a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read for the big idea

1. Tells students to read again and answer the questions in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (7 min) Students read for the answers

1. Puts students into groups of 3. 2. Tells students that they are going to draw their dream house. It‟s the group‟s dream house. 3. Tells students to answer the questions with their ideas first. Students in each group have to agree about where and what their house would be like. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 12 mins.

Activity 4: (15 mins) Writing and drawing

1. Chooses one student from each team to report about their work. 2. Calls each reporter in front of the class. Tells them to talk about their work for 1 minute. 3. Asks the other students to think of one question for the reporting team. 4. Displays some of the students‟ work. 5. Have a class vote to see which of the house students like best.

Activity 5: (11 mins) Speaking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Read the text.

Match the texts with the photos.

Check answers.

Read & answers.

Compare.

Check.

Work in groups of 3.

Draw about dream house.

Think about where & what their house would be like.

Choose a reporter.

A reporter of each team tells the class about their work/dream house.

Display their work/dream house.

Have a class vote!

240

1. Asks some students which of the pictures they like best and why.

1. Tells students to write about things are in their dream house. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 23 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

241

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country. Unit 23: My cool house Lesson C: My cool house – The coolest room ever! Pages: 144-145 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your house. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their house through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes a word on the board. Uses the word from this unit (e.g. bathroom). 2. Tells students that some words can be made from the letters in the word bathroom (e.g. room, bath, room, bat, hat) 3. Writes bath on the board. Asks students if they can make some more words. 4. Writes the words on the board as students call them out. 5. Puts students into groups of 3/4. 6. Tells students that they are going to play the same game. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Play New words‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

242

7. Tells students to write the words in their notebooks. 8. Writes another word on the board from this unit of previous ones. 9. Gives a time limit of 1 minute for each word. 10. Writes the words students make on the board. Gives points for each correct word.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson C: My cool house â&#x20AC;&#x201C; The coolest room ever!

1. Tells students your favourite room in your house (e.g. bedroom) and why. Draws on the board (e.g. bedroom â&#x20AC;&#x201C; bed). Puts students in pairs. 2. Tells students to talk to their partners about the parts of the house they like best. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Asks some ideas from the class.

Activity 1: (7 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students that they are going to listen to Dara, Sophal and Bopha talking about their favourite place in the house. 2. Tells them to write their names in their notebooks. 3. Asks: Who likes the same place as you? 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to listen again and complete the sentences in their notebooks. 2. Tells students NOT to copy the sentences. They write only the answers in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Checks answers a class.

Activity 3: (7 min) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully.

Talk to their partners about parts of the house they like best.

Share ideas.

Listen.

Write their names in their notebooks. Respond.

Check.

Read & complete.

Write only the answers.

Check.

243

1. Quickly copy the table in activity 4 on the board. 2. Asks a student: Do you like the living room? Students: yes. 3. Puts a tick next to living room on the table. 4. Puts students into groups of 4/5. 5. Tells students to copy the table in their notebooks. 6. Tells students that they are going to ask their group mates about the rooms in the house they like best. 7. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Speaking – class survey

1. Writes this on the board: In my group, _____ people like the living room. 2. Asks some students: How many students in your group like the living room? 3. Writes the number on the board. 4. Tells students to complete the sentences in their notebooks. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Writing

1. Tells students to make a bar graph of their results. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Shows some of student‟s completed work in class. 4. Tells students to do this for homework if they haven‟t finished yet.

Activity 6: (7 mins) Writing

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins) I can talk about some rooms in my house. I can talk about my favourite places in my house. I can ask and answer questions about where some things are in my house

Listen carefully.

Respond.

Put a tick next to living room.

Work in groups of 4/5. Copy the table.

Ask & answer.

Look at the board.

Respond.

Complete.

Make a bar graph.

Show some of student‟s work.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner. Respond.

244

1. Tells students to write about things they want to add more to their house. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 24 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

245

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country. Unit 24: Cool place in my town Lesson A: Cool place in my town – Where is it? Pages: 146-147 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about and describing your town. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe their town through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes a four letter word on the board (e.g. bend). 2. Tells students that we can make some more words by changing one letter of this word, one at a time (e.g. band, bent, tent, bind). 3. Asks students if they can make a few words by changing one of the letters, one at a time. 4. Writes the words on the board as students call them out. 5. Puts students into groups of 4/5. 6. Tells students that they are going to play the same game. 7. Tells students to choose a writer Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Change the letters‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

246

a speaker in their teams. 8. Writes a three /four letter word on the board (e.g. cat, bag, tray, send) 9. The team thinks of words they can make by changing one of the letters, one at a time. The writer writes the words on a piece of paper.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (44 mins) Lesson A: Cool places in my town – Where is it?

1. Tells students to look at the photos in activity 1. 2. Asks them which of the photos are in their town. 3. Asks them which places are in their towns that are not in the photos (e.g. pagoda, park). If students say the words in Khmer, asks them what the English words are. Gives them time to guess before telling them what the English words are. 4. Tells students to work with their partners. 5. In pairs, students say which of the photos are in their town and think of other places in their town that aren‟t in the book. 6. Asks students what places are in their town and which places are in their town but are not in the book.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students to number the photos in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Tells students to listen and check. 4. Tells students to listen and repeat.

Activity 1: (5 mins) New words

1. Asks some students what they think Dara‟s favourite place in town is and why. 2. Have a class vote! (e.g. How many students think Dara‟s

Activity 2: (6 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the photos.

Respond.

Work in pairs.

Respond.

Number the photos.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Respond.

Have a class vote! 247

favourite place is the park? 3. Tells students they are going to listen to Linda. What does Lind think Dara‟s favourite place is? 4. Plays the recording. 5. Asks: What does Linda think Dara‟s favourite place is? 6. Tells students that they are going to listen to Avorng. What does Avorng think Dara‟s favourite place is? 7. Plays the recording. 8. Asks: What does Avorng think Dara‟s favourite place is? 9. Tells students they are going to listen to Sophal. What does Sophal think Dara‟s favourite place is? 10. Plays the recording. 11. Ask: What does Sophal think Dara‟s favourite place is? 12. Tells students they are going to listen to Dara. Who is correct? 13. Plays the recording. 14. Ask: what is Dara‟s favourite place? 1. Tells students they are going to listen again. 2. Tells them to complete the table in activity 3 in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Tells students to compare their answers with their pairs. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (7 min) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to work with their partner. 2. In pairs, students talk about their favourite places in town and why. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Asks students what some of their favourite places are and why.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Speaking

1. Tells students to complete the exercises in the grammar box. 2. Students think about the rules. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Grammar box

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Listen to the teacher.

Listen to the tape. Respond.

Listen to the teacher.

Listen to the tape. Respond.

Listen to the teacher.

Listen to the tape. Respond.

Listen to the teacher.

Listen to the tape. Respond.

Listen carefully.

Complete the table.

Compare.

Check.

Work with their partner.

Talk about favourite places in town and why.

Respond.

Complete.

Think about the rules. Check. 248

1. Tells students to work with a different partner. 2. Asks them to think of their favourite place, but not to tell their partner. 3. Their partner will ask questions about their favourite place. Their partner will try and guess what that place is. 4. Students ask and answer questions to with their new partner.

1. Asks students what their favourite places in town are. Asks them if they can guess your favourite place.

1. Tells students to write about their parents‟ favourite place. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 24 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Activity 6: (8 mins) Speaking

Work with a different partner.

Think of favourite place.

Try and guess what the place is.

Ask & answer.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

249

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country. Unit 24: Cool place in my town Lesson B: Cool place in my town – Favourite places in my town Pages: 148-149 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about and describing your town. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe their town through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Draws a picture of an elephant on the board like this: 2. Chooses a word (e.g. cinema, hospital, school, etc.). 3. Writes a line for each letter on the board. 4. Asks a student to guess a letter. 5. If the letter is in the word, writes it in the correct space. 6. If the letter is not in the word, writes it elsewhere on the board and erase one part of the elephant (e.g. begin with the trunk, then the eye, then the mouth, etc.). Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Disappearing elephant‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

250

7. Repeats steps 4-6 until students have guessed the word. 8. Puts students in groups of 5/6. 9. In groups, students take it in turns to draw the elephant and lets other students guess.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson B: Cool places in my town – Favourite places in my town

1. Puts students in pairs. 2. Tells students to look at the picture in activity 1. Gives a time limit of 30 seconds. 3. Stops students after 30 seconds. Tells them to close their books. 4. In pairs, they try and remember what they see in the picture. 5. Asks instruction checking questions. 6. Repeats steps 2-4, 2 more times. 7. Asks questions (e.g. where is the bus station? How many schools are there?)

Activity 1: (7 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students they are going to read about Sophal‟s town. 2. Asks them if they remember where Sophal is from. 3. Tells students to read quickly. They don‟t need to understand all the words. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Asks: Do you like Sophal‟s town? Is it the same or different to your town? 6. Collect some ideas from the class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read for the big idea

1. Tells students to read the text again and find the places in the map. 2. They write the places in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (7 min) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Work in pairs. Look at the picture.

Stop after 30 seconds.

Try and remember what they see.

Repeat steps 2-4, 2 more times. Respond.

Listen carefully.

Read.

Respond.

Share ideas.

Read & find the places in the map.

Write the places in notebooks.

Check. 251

1. Tells students they are going to draw a map of their town in their notebooks. 2. Tells them to use the map of Sophal‟s town in activity 3 as a model. 3. Tells students to write some sentences about their map too. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 15 mins.

Activity 4: (17 mins) Writing

1. Tells students to walk around. 2. Tells students to ask and answer questions about their map. Do they have similar maps? What things are different? 3. Tells them to draw a smiley face if they like the picture. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Speaking

1. Shows some completed pictures of the students‟ town. 2. Asks them what things are the same and different from each other‟s map.

1. Tells students to write about their friend‟s favourite place. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 24 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Listen carefully/draw a map of their town.

Use the map of Sophal‟s town in activity 3 as a model.

Write some sentences about their map.

Walk around. Ask & answer.

Draw a smiley face.

Show completed pictures.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

252

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country. Unit 24: Cool place in my town Lesson C: Cool place in my town – Turn left, turn right Pages: 150-151 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about and describing your town. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe their town through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes a letter on the board (e.g. h). 2. Tells students to think of words that start with the letter written on the board (e.g. house, hat, high, etc.) 3. Writes the words on the board as students call them out. 4. Puts students in groups of 4/5. 5. Writes another letter on the board. 6. Students write down words beginning with the letter on the board in their notebooks. 7. Assigns a „writer‟ in each team. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: „Beginning letter‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

253

8. Sets a time limit of 30 seconds per letter. 9. The team with the most number of words wins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson C: Cool places in my town â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Turn left, turn right

1. Tells students to look at the photos in activity 1. 2. Tells them to guess what they are in pairs. Gives a time limit of 30 seconds. 3. Asks students to number the photos in their notebooks. 4. Tells students to listen and check. 5. Tells students to listen and repeat.

Activity 1: (5 mins) New words

1. Asks some students to listen and follow your instructions (e.g. Sophal, walk straight on to the board. Vithu, take your book. Puts it in between your desk and Vutha). Repeats this with several students. 2. Then asks some students to give directions to some of their classmates.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students to look at the map in activity 3. 2. Tells students this is a map to Avorngâ&#x20AC;&#x;s house. 3. Tells students to listen and follow the directions to Avorngâ&#x20AC;&#x;s house. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Plays the recording. 6. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners. (1 min) 7. Plays the recording again. 8. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners. (1 mins) 9. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (7 min) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the photos.

Guess.

Number the photos.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Listen & follow.

Give directions to their classmates.

Look at the map.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Listen again.

Compare.

Check.

254

1. Puts students in pairs. 2. Tells students they are going to find some places. They listen to their partners for directions. 3. Student A turns to page 234. 4. Student B turns to page 239. 5. Tells students not to look at their partner‟s page. 6. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 6 mins.

Activity 4: (8 mins) Speaking

1. Tells students to draw a map of their house from school in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and give a time limit of 7 mins. 1. Tells students to swap papers/notebooks. 2. Tells students to take it in turns to read the maps to their classmates. Are the directions correct? 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 4. Asks some students to read out their classmates‟ map to the class. 1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about their friend‟s favourite place. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 25 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Work in pairs. Listen carefully.

Student A turns to page 234. Student B turns to page 239.

Activity 5: (8 mins) Drawing

Draw a map of their house from school.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Speaking

Swap papers/notebooks.

Take turns to read the maps.

Read out their classmates‟ map.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner.

Respond.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins) I can talk about some places in my town. I can talk about my favourite place in my town. Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework: Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

255

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change? Unit 25: Do I have to? Lesson A: Do I have to? – It‟s not fair Pages: 152-153 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your school and your home chores / obligations. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their school and their home chores / obligations through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. What can they see? 2. Asks students what‟s wrong with Tom? 3. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Comes back together as a class and gets some different ideas.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (3 mins) Students guess

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Look at the picture & cover the text.

Respond.

Compare.

Share ideas.

256

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (47 mins) Lesson A: Do I have to? – It‟s not fair

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students listen. 4. Tells students to compare their answer with their partner/group. 5. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write 1-9 in their notebooks. Tells students to try and remember/guess whether the statements are true or false. 3. Tells them to listen and write the answers next to the numbers in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students listen. 6. Students compare. 7. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to close their books and look at you. Asks: Do you get in trouble f you don‟t wear a school uniform? Students: Yes. Asks: What happens? Writes: you have to wear a school uniform. On the board. Asks: What‟s the question? Students: Do you have to wear a school uniform? Asks: What‟s the answer? Students: Yes, I do. (1 min). 2. Tells students to answer the questions in activity so that they are true about them. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Tells students to compare their answers with their group/partner.

Activity 3: (7 min) Grammar presentation / controlled practice

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Share ideas.

Work with a partner.

Write 1-9 in notebooks.

Listen & write the answers next to the numbers in notebooks.

Listen. Compare. Ask & answer.

Listen carefully & respond.

Respond.

Compare.

257

1. Elicit/Pre-teach gets in more trouble. 2. Tells students to discuss the questions in activity 4 in their groups. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 4: (3 mins) Post task

1. Tells students that they are going to listen to and learn a rap together. 2. Tells students to read along and clap the beat. 3. Plays the recording. 4. Tells students to practice the rap in groups. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 6. Tells the left the half of the room they are „mum‟. Tells the right half of the room they are „kids‟. 7. Plays the recording again. Have students say the words and clap and click. 8. Students try it without the recording. 9. Swaps sides of the room so the right side of the room are mums and the left side of the room are kids. 10. When your students are ready, claps faster! Can students keep up?

Activity 5: (7 mins) Rap!

1. Asks students what their mums and dads tell them to do around the house. Gets 1 or 2 suggestions. 2. Tells students to make their own list of things they have to do around the house. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Freer practice

1. Ask some „Do you have to…‟ questions to 2 or 3 different students. 2. Tells students to compare what they have to do at home with their friends.

Activity 7: (3 mins) Freer practice

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Discuss the questions.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Read along & clap beat.

Listen. Practice the rap.

Listen again.

Try it out.

Swap the sides.

Start their work.

Respond.

Make their own list of things they have to do around the house.

Respond.

Compare.

258

3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 1. Tells students they are going to do the rap again, but this time the groups are going to take it in turns to be the mums. Tells each group that they need to choose a job for the rest of the class. Gives groups a moment to choose a job.

Asks some questions about what students have to do around the house.

1. Tells students to write about what they to do around the school. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 25 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Rap! (7 mins) Personalisation

Do the rap again!

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

259

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change? Unit 25: Do I have to? Lesson B: Do I have to? – Crazy schools Pages: 154-155 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your school and your home chores / obligations. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their school and their home chores / obligations through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students to stand up and look at the teacher. 2. Divides the class in half (e.g. left and right halves of the room). Asks for a tem name from each side. 3. Writes the team names on the board. Marks 5 points for each team (e.g. 11111). 4. Says that you will tell them to do things. If you say „Sok says‟ they have to do them, but they shouldn‟t do them if you don‟t say Sok says. 5. When someone gets „out‟, erase Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: „Sok says‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

260

a point from their team. 6. Continues until one team has lost all their points. The other team is the winner!

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (48 mins) Lesson B: Do I have to? – Crazy schools

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. What can they see? 2. Asks students what can you see in the picture? 3. Asks students what do you think students learn at this school? 4. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 5. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students they are going to listen and read and check their guesses. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students compare their answers with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Asks: What‟s the girl‟s name? students: Her name is Lucy. Tells students to point to the part of the reading that they found the answer. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Students complete. 4. Students compare with their group/partner. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students read for the answers

1. Draws 2 columns on the board. 2. Asks students questions until you have written 1 sentence in the We have to column and one sentence in the We don’t have to

Activity 4: (6 mins) Personalisation

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture & cover the text.

Respond.

Compare.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen & read. Compare.

Check.

Respond.

Complete. Compare.

Check.

Look at the board.

Respond.

261

column. (e.g. Do we have to wear a uniform at school?). Puts students in groups of 4. Tells students to choose 1 person to be the writer. Tells students to write down as many as they can in the time limit. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. Gets some different ideas.

1. Tells students that they are going to read about a school. Do they think it is a real school? 2. Reads the text. Asks: Is it a real school or an imaginary school? 3. Tells students to look at the model and answer the questions but not to write. They should speak only. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Asks and answers the questions.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Looking at a model (a model for writing)

1. Tells students they are going to make up their own school. It can be a real school (such as an after school programme), an imaginary school, or a very silly school! 2. Tells students to make notes about the school using the same questions. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Makin notes

1. Tells students that they are going to use their notes to write about their own dream school. 2. Students can follow the model closely if this is what they feel most comfortable with, but encourage creativity! 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 7: (9 mins) Writing

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Write down as many as they can.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen & respond.

Ask & answer.

Listen carefully.

Make notes.

Use their notes to write about their own dream school.

Follow the model.

262

1. Tells students to share their ideas with their group. Their group should ask extra questions about what they have to and don‟t have to do at the school. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

1. Asks some students to tell you some school rules in their school. Chooses students that you don‟t normally call on.

1. Tells students to write about rules in their school with „have to and don‟t have to‟ 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 25 on page 208 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Activity 8: (5 mins) Post task – speaking

Share ideas.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

263

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change? Unit 25: Do I have to? Lesson C: Do I have to? – It‟s a big job Pages: 156-157 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about your school and your home chores / obligations. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their school and their home chores / obligations through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes a word on the board (e.g. small). 2. Asks: What small things can you think of? (e.g. pencil, pen, rat, paper). Accepts all possible answers. 3. Tells students they are going to play the same game in groups. 4. Puts students into groups of 5/6. 5. Asks a question / writes on the board (red, square, bigger than the teacher, yellow) 6. Have the last category as “Pets”. (This is in with today‟s lesson.) 7. In groups, students write down Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: „How many things can you think of?‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

264

as many things they can think of that are red, square, bigger that the teacher, yellow, etc. 8. Gives a time limit of 1 min for each word or phrase.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (45 mins) Lesson B: Do I have to? – It‟s a big job

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the questions. What can they see? 2. Asks students to name the animals in the picture. 3. Asks students what they think Dara‟s new job might be. 4. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 5. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to try and remember/guess if the sentences are true or false. Tells them to tick and cross in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Tells students to listen and check. 5. Tells students to compare with their group/partner. 6. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Reads the instructions for activity 3 as a class. Tells students to think about “An English teacher” as a class. Tells students to brainstorm some

Activity 3: (5 min) Brainstorming

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture & cover the questions.

Name the animals.

Respond.

Compare.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work with a partner.

Tick & cross.

Listen & check.

Compare.

Ask & answer.

Listen carefully.

265

things that an English teacher has to do and be as a class. (e.g. They have to go to school. They have to speak English. They have to be fun. They have to be smart…) 2. Tells students to continue thinking about things that people have to do in other jobs. Tells students not to write but they should speak. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Asks some ideas from the class. 1. Asks a student to choose a „job‟ but not to tell you what it is. Asks questions with “Do you have to …” (e.g. Do you have to run? Do you have to be scary? Etc.) Guess the job! Did you guess right? 2. Tells students they are going to take it in turns to play the game with their group/partner. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Speaking

1. Asks students if they can guess what job the interview questions are for. Gives them a hint. Tell them it‟s from the list. 2. Reads the questions out loud to the class. 3. Gets some guesses.

Activity 5: (2 mins) Preparing to listen

1. Tells students that they are going to listen to an interview and decide if the person can do the job. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Plays the recording and then tells students to compare with their group/partner. 4. Asks the class the answers.

Activity 6: (3 mins) Listening to a model

1. Tells students to write their own interview about one of a job of their choice. 2. Asks instruction checking

Activity 7: (10 mins) Speaking practice

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Brainstorm.

Share ideas.

Choose a job & respond.

Play the same game.

Listen carefully.

Listen.

Share guesses.

Listen carefully.

Listen & compare.

Share answers.

Write their own interview about one job.

266

questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Tells students work in pairs. 1. Asks students to look at the „can do‟ statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about one job they want to do and why. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 26 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Work in pairs.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare with a partner. Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins) I can talk about things I have to do. I can talk about things I don‟t have to do. I can ask what other people have to do.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

267

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change? Unit 26: New babies Lesson A: New babies – Baby bird Pages: 158-159 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about things and activities you like and dislike. ~ Talking about your hobbies and abilities. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things and activities they like and dislike & their hobbies and abilities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students to stand up. 2. Puts students into 4 groups. 3. Tells students to decide on a team name. 4. Writes the team names on the board. 5. Have one student from each group go to the board and face the class so they cannot see the board. 6. Writes a verb on the board (e.g. walk.) tells student facing the class that they are not allowed to look at the word! They have to Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: Review verbs

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

268

look at their groups acting and see if they can guess the word from their groupâ&#x20AC;&#x;s acting! (Tells students to look if no one has guessed it after a minute). 7. Rule: - The people at the board can talk. - The people trying to act and show the word are not allowed to talk. - First team to guess gets a point. 8. Asks instruction checking questions.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson A: New babies â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Baby bird

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students What do you think the birds are? 3. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Asks instruction checking question. 3. Students listen. 4. Tells students to compare with their partner/group. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to try and remember/guess who says the sentences. Gives a 3 mins time limit. 3. Tells students to write 1-8 in their notebooks. Then tells them to listen and write D for Dara and L for Linda and A for Avorng. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Tells students to listen and check. 6. Tells students to compare with

Activity 2: (10 mins) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work with a partner.

Guess/remember.

Write 1-8 in their notebooks.

Listen & check.

Compare. 269

their group/partner. 7. Asks and answers questions as a class. 1. Puts students into groups of 4. Tells students to choose one person to be the writer in each group. 2. Reads the question aloud to the class. Tells students to discuss the question in groups and to make a list of things that babies do. (e.g. smile, cry, sleep, eat, drink, etc). 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Talks about things that babies do as a class.

Activity 3: (5 min) Post task

Ask & answer.

Work in groups of 4.

Discuss & make a list of things that babies do.

Talk about things that babies do.

1. Tells students to listen and repeat after the tape. 2. Asks instruction checking questions.

Activity 4: (3 mins) Pronunciation review /s/ speaks/ works / walks /z/ plays / drives / listens / lives / /iz/ brushes / teaches / dances

Listen & repeat.

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Tells students that they are going to play a game. Holds up 3 pieces of paper. Tells students to write /s/ on one piece of paper, /z/ on another and /iz/ on the last one. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and says 1 min! who can be the first?! 4. Tells students to put 3 pieces of paper in the middle of the table. Tells students that they are going to hear a word and they need to listen to the end sound and snap (hit) the sound they hear. If they are first, they get a point. 5. Asks instruction checking questions. 6. Plays the recording and pauses after each word to find out which end sound it was.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Game! Snap! Works /s/ plays /z/ teaches /iz/ lives /z/ teaches /iz/ opens /z/ makes /s/ saves /z/ cries /z/ likes /s/ practices /iz/

Work in groups of 4. Listen carefully.

Listen.

Work in groups of 4. Talk about the people & be careful of their end sounds.

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Tells students to talk about the people and be careful of their end sounds! Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 6: (10 mins) Freer practice

270

3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

1. Asks some students some Do you know any who… questions. 2. Listen to students answers. Are students using the end sounds? Is it natural or do they need more practice?

1. Tells students to write about one bird they like. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 26 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Respond.

Sound.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

271

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change? Unit 26: New babies Lesson B: New babies – My weird family Pages: 160-161 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about things and activities you like and dislike. ~ Talking about your hobbies and abilities. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things and activities they like and dislike & their hobbies and abilities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Step II: 1. Puts students into groups of 4. Warmer/Review (5 mins) 2. Tells students to choose 1 person Warmer: Review New Words to be the writer. 3. Tells students you are going to give them 1 minute to write down as many different family members as they can. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Writes: Is it your mum? On the board. 6. Draws one of your family members on the board (10 seconds! Don‟t worry if it looks Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

272

stupid!) Asks: Who is it? Have students guess! 7. Tells students they are going to play a game in their groups. They have to draw a family member and the first person to guess it in their group gets a point. 8. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (44 mins) Lesson B: New babies â&#x20AC;&#x201C; My weird family

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. What can they see? 2. Asks students who are the people? 3. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and read and decide who the people in the picture are. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Fingers Ready? Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students to compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Writes ____ likes hanging out with Linda. On the board. 2. Asks: Who is it? Students: Tom. 3. Tells students to point to the part of the text where they found the answer. Writes Tom likes hanging out with Linda. 4. Tells students to answer the rest of the questions in their notebooks. 5. Asks instruction checking

Activity 3: (10 min) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen & read.

Compare.

Check.

Look at the board.

Respond. Point to where they found the answer.

Answer the rest of the questions.

273

questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 6. Tells students to compare with their group/partner. 7. Checks answers as a class.

Compare.

Check.

1. Tells students to work with a partner. Tells students that one person is going to pretend to be Tom and the other person is going to ask them questions from the activity 4. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 4: (3 mins) Modeling/role play

Listen carefully & work in pairs.

1. Tells students they are going to take note about their family. They should not write sentences. Tells them to answer the questions in notes in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Taking notes

Take notes about their family & answer the questions.

1. Tells students they are going to ask and answer questions about their family with their partner. Partners have to listen and ask at least one extra question about their partnerâ&#x20AC;&#x;s family. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 6: (4 mins) Comparing notes

Ask & answer.

1. Tells students that they are going to write about their own family using their notes. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 7: (9 mins) Writing about your family

Write about their own family.

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Tells students to take it in turns to read their writing to their group and to decide if they would like to be in their friendâ&#x20AC;&#x;s family. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 4. Students share their work.

Activity 8: (5 mins) Post task

Work in groups of 4. Take turns to read their writing.

Share their work.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

274

Have some students read their pieces to the class.

1. Tells students to write about their family they want to have. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 26 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Read their work.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

275

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change? Unit 26: New babies Lesson C: New babies – I hat them! Pages: 162-163 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about things and activities you like and dislike. ~ Talking about your hobbies and abilities. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things and activities they like and dislike & their hobbies and abilities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Writes: What I like about you is… on the board. 3. Asks students to help you finish the sentence about you! (e.g. What I like about you is you‟re a good teacher. Or What I like about you is you‟re funny. 4. Tells students they are going to say nice things about each person in the group for 30 seconds! Students have to finish the sentence What I like about you is with something true. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: What I like about you is

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

276

5. Tells students you are going to clap your hands at the end of 30 seconds and they need to change the person they are talking about. 6. Asks instruction checking questions.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) Lesson C: New babies â&#x20AC;&#x201C; I hat them!

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students Who is the boy in the picture? Do you remember his brother? What do you think Tom thinks about his brother? 3. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students to look at the question and guess the answer with their partner. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 minute. 3. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 4. Students listen. 5. Tells students to compare with their partner/group. 6. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to try and remember/guess the things that Tomâ&#x20AC;&#x;s brother hates not has. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Tells students to write a-h in their notebooks. Tells students to listen and circle the ones they hear. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Tells students to listen and check. 6. Tells students to compare with their group/partner.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work with a partner.

Remember/guess.

Write a-h in their notebooks.

Listen & check.

Compare. 277

7. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Ask & answer.

Look at the board. Listen. Listen & repeat.

Practice in pairs.

1. Writes the chant on the board. 2. Students listen to the chant. 3. Students listen and repeat. Makes up action as a class. (e.g. I don‟t like an ice cream. Students pretend to eat an ice cream, I don‟t like blue. Students point to something blue, etc.) 4. Erases some words. Students recite the chant. 5. Erases some more words. Do this until you have completely erased the chant. 6. Who can memorize the chant? Nominates a few students to try this out in front of the class. 7. Students practice in pairs.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Learn a chant

1. Tells students to make their own list of things they hate. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Personalisation

Make their own list of things they hate.

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Tells students they need to discuss their answers with their group. They need to talk about whether they agree or disagree with their friends hate list and why. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 6: (6 mins) Discussion

Work in groups of 4. Discuss.

1. Tells student that they will hear sentences. They need to make noise to say if they think the things are true of false? Rules: - If students think a statement is false, students stomp their feet. - If they think the answer is true, students clap their hands. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Says a few sentences about things you hat. E.g. I hate noodles! 4. Have some students „be the

Class feedback / vote (3 mis)

Listen carefully.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

- be the teacher! 278

teacher‟ and read things from their hate list.

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins) I can say what people think. I can tell you about my family. I can tell you what I hate and why.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Tells students to write about how Homework: to solve when you hate someone. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 27 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Look at the can do statements.

Compare.

Respond.

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

279

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change? Unit 27: Yummy Lesson A: Yummy – What have you got for lunch today? Pages: 164-165 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about the food you like and dislike. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the food they like and dislike through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes the number „2‟ on the board. 2. Tells students to count up to 10 but for every multiple of 2, they say „buzz‟ (e.g. 1, buzz, 3, buzz, 5, buzz…). 3. Writes another number on the board (e.g. 3) 4. Tells students to count up to 20, but for every multiple of 3, they say „buzz‟ (e.g. 1, 2, buzz, 4, 5, buzz…) 5. Puts students in groups of 4/5. 6. Writes another number on the board. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: Play „Buzz‟ – Review number 1-20

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

280

7. In groups, students take turns counting up one number at a time, but for any multiple of that number, they say „buzz‟.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) Lesson A: Yummy – What have you got for lunch today?

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

1. Asks students to work with a partner. Tells students to look at the pictures and cover the words. Do they know any of the names for food and drink already? 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Activate pre-existing vocab

Look at the picture & cover the words.

1. Tells students to match the words with the photos. 2. Tells students to write the words in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Tells students to compare with their group/partner. 5. Students listen and check and repeat.

Activity 2: (5 mins) New words

Match the words with the photos. Write the words in their notebooks.

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students to name the food they know in the picture. 3. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some answers from the class. 5. Asks students to guess whose lunch is whose. 6. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 3: (4 min) Students guess

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Compare.

Listen & check/repeat.

Look at the picture.

Name the food they know. Compare.

Share answers. Guess.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check. 281

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to try and remember/guess if the sentences are true or false. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Tells students to write 2-9 in their notebooks. Tells them to listen tick for true and cross for false. 5. Asks instruction checking questions. 6. Tells students to listen and check. 7. Tells students to compare with their partner/group. 8. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Students listen for the answer

1. Tells students to look at the grammar box for one minute. They can talk to their friends. Tells students that you will ask them questions at the end of one minute. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 minute. 3. At the end of the time, claps your hands and ask concept checking questions (e.g. Can we count all foods in English? Can we count apples? Can we count rice? Can I say some rices? Can I say some apple?

Grammar presentation (2 mins)

1. Tells students to look at the list of foods from activity 2. 2. Says: an egg. Which column should write it in? can count or canâ&#x20AC;&#x;t count? Students: can count. 3. Tells students to draw 2 columns in their notebooks and to add the new words to the right columns. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Asks students to compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks the answers as a class.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Controlled practice

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Work with a partner.

Remember/guess.

Write 2-9 & tick/cross.

Listen & check.

Compare.

Look at the grammar box/ discuss with friends.

Think/respond.

Look at the list of foods.

Respond.

Draw 2 columns.

Compare.

Check. 282

1. Tells students to work with their partner. 2. Tells students to decide who is student A and who is student B in their pairs. 3. Tells student A‟s to raise their hands. Tells student B‟s to raise their hands. 4. Tells students A‟s to turn to page 234. Tells student B‟s to turn to page 239 but not to show their partner their page. 5. Tells student A that they have a shop and they will have a customer soon. Tells student B that they are going to go shopping and ask the shop keeper for things. They need to tick the things of the list as they go. 6. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

1. Asks students if they got everything on their shopping list. Listens to their answers. Are they pronouncing the plural „s‟? Are they adding plural „s‟ to things they shouldn‟t?

1. Tells students to write about what food they like and why. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 27 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Activity 7: (8 mins) Freer practice

Work in pairs.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

283

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change? Unit 27: Yummy Lesson B: Yummy – Have a picnic Pages: 166-167 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about the food you like and dislike. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the food they like and dislike through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students into groups of 4. 2. Tells students to choose one writer in each group. 3. Tells students to brainstorm as many foods and drinks as they can. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Tells students that they are going to play a game. They will hear foods and drinks. If a food or drink is countable, students have to bark like a dog. If a food and drink is uncountable, students Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer:

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

284

need to meow like a cat. 6. Asks instruction checking questions.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson B: Yummy â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Have a picnic

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. 2. Asks students What can you see in the picture? What are they doing? 3. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students to look at the picture of the characters having a picnic and to try to fin the new words in it. Tells students not to write and gives a time limit of 1 minute. 2. Asks and answers as a class.

Activity 2: (3 mins) Pre-teach words

1. Tells students they are going to listen and tick the food that they hear. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Tells students to compare their answer with their group/partner. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. This reading develops problem solving skills. It works a little differently to a normal reading. Students may benefit from working in group/discussing answers as a partner as they go. Donâ&#x20AC;&#x;t insist on silent reading. 2. Do the first question together as a class. Have students point to the answer in the text. 3. Tells students to do the other questions in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. Students complete. 6. Students compare with their

Activity 4: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

Look at the picture.

Ask & answer.

Listen & tick.

Compare.

Check.

Listen carefully.

Do the first question.

Do the other questions.

Complete. Compare. 285

group/partner. 7. Checks answers as a class.

Check.

1. Tells students to talk in their groups about the questions. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 5: (3 mins) Post task/Personalisation

Talk about the questions in their groups.

1. Tells students they are going to listen to a rap. Encourages students to join in with clapping and actions. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Repeats the recording 2-3 times or still students can join in.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Grammar practice

Listen carefully.

Listen.

1. Tells students to look at the Yummy yum rap rules. 2. Do the first one together as a class. Have students point to example in the rap. (e.g. We use it when there is one. Because have an (1) orange. Eat it up. 3. Tells students to talk to their friends and answer the questions with their friends. They do not have to write it in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Asks and answers the questions as a class.

Activity 7: (3 mins) Grammar presentation

Look at the Yummy yum rap rules. Do the first one.

Talk & answer.

Ask & answer.

1. Tells students fill the gaps in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Asks and answers as a class.

Activity 8: (3 mins) Controlled practice

Fill the gaps.

Ask & answer.

1. Tells students to write more lines for the rap. They can use vocab from outside of todayâ&#x20AC;&#x;s lesson (as long as in English). 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 3. Tells students to compare with their group/partner.

Activity 9: (5 mins) Freer practice

Write more line for the rap.

Compare.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

286

1. Sing the Yummy Yum rap together as a class. Encourages clapping and actions. 2. Tells students that they are going to do the rap together as a class. 3. Can students remember which nouns are countable and which nouns aren‟t?

1. Tells students to write about the benefits of having a picnic. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 27 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (10 mins)

Sin the Yummy Yum rap.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

287

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change? Unit 27: Yummy Lesson C: Yummy – Stop playing with your food! Pages: 168-169 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about the food you like and dislike. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the food they like and dislike through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. What can they see? 2. Asks students What food are the festivals about? What are the people doing? Where do you think they are? 3. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some answers from the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (3 mins) Activity 1: Students guess

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

288

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (44 mins) Lesson C: Yummy â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Stop playing with your food!

1. Tells students they are going to listen and match the texts with the pictures. 2. Tells students they are going to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Fingers Ready? Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students to compare their answers with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Do the first question together as a class. Have students point to where the answer is in the text. 2. Tells students to do the other questions in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins. 4. Students complete. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students read for the answers

1. Tells students to look at the picture. 2. Asks: What kind of festival do you think this is? 3. Tells students to cover the text, read the question and guess the answers with their partners. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Tells students to now read the text quickly and to discuss the answers with their partner, but not to write. 6. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 7. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Looking at a model

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Listen & read.

Compare.

Check.

Do the first question as a class.

Do the other questions.

Complete. Compare.

Check.

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Cover the text & read the questions & guess the answers.

Read & discuss.

Ask & answer.

289

1. Puts students into groups of 4 and tells them to choose a student to be the writer. 2. Tells students that they are going to write their own food festival. Tells students that the idea is for the festival to be as creative as possible. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 5: (8 mins) Personalisation

1. Tells students to use their notes to write about their festival. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 1. Asks the names of the festivals and write them on the board. 2. Tells students to stand up. They are going to talk to as many people as they can and tell them about their groupâ&#x20AC;&#x;s amazing festival and make them think it is the best festival to go to. They have to leave their writing at their desk. Who can win the competition? 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. At the end of the time, claps your hands and tells students to return to their seats. Reads out the festival names one by one. Have students clap for the festival they think sounds the most interesting. OR: 1. Tells students they are going to listen to each of the groups read out their festivals and they have to listen and se which one they think sounds the coolest. 2. Asks instruction checking questions about polite behavior when a student is speaking to the class. 3. When all the groups have shared, read out the festival names one by one. Have students clap for the festival they Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Work in groups of 4.

Write about their own food festival.

Activity 6: (7 mins) Writing

Use their notes to write about their festival.

Freer practice: (7 mins)

Respond/look at the board.

Listen carefully.

Talk about the names of the festival.

290

think sounds the most interesting.

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about the food they dislike and why. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 28 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins) I can talk about food and drink. I can say what I have for lunch today. I can say what foods I like and don‟t like.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare. Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

291

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past Unit 28: The swinging 60s Lesson A: The swinging 60s – I was young once Pages: 170-171 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about and describing things that existed in the past. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe things that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students into groups of 4. 2. Writes: Phnom Penh, Siem Reap, Battambang, Sihanoukville on the board. 3. Tells students to talk about these places. What do they know? What is in these cities? (e.g. Angkor Wat is in Siem Reap. The Royal Palace is in Phnom Penh. There is a beach in Sihanouk ville. My mum lives in Battambang etc.) 4. Gets some ideas from the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Lead in

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Work in groups of 4. Look at the board.

Talk.

Share ideas.

292

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about? 1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? Is she old or young? How old is she? 2. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 3. Gets some answers from the class.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson A: The swinging 60s â&#x20AC;&#x201C; I was young once Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen to find out where the lady is from. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students listen. 4. Tells students to compare with their partner/group. 5. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write a-h in their notebooks. Tells students to try and remember/what the woman says was in Phnom Penh. 3. Tells them to listen and tick and cross the things in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students listen. 6. Students compare with their group/partner. 7. Asks for some answers as a class.

Activity 2: (9 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Asks students if they think Phnom Penh was the same or different in the 1960s. 2. Puts students into groups of 4. Tells students to think of 3 things they things might be different now. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 3: (3 min) Students guess

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture/respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work with a partner.

Write a-h/remember what the woman says was in Phnom Penh.

Tick/cross.

Listen. Compare.

Share answers.

Think about Phnom Penh/Respond.

Work in groups of 4.

293

4. Asks some ideas from the class. 1. Asks students what they think Monineath think about Phnom Penh 1960s. 2. Tells students they are going to listen and check their guesses. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Students listen. 5. Tells students to compare with their partner/group. 6. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 4: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write a-i in their notebooks. Tells students to try and remember/what the woman says was in Phnom Penh. 3. Tells them to listen and tick and cross the things in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students listen. 6. Students compare with their group/partner. 7. Asks for some answers as a class.

Activity 5: (9 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to look at the sentences. 2. Says: I was born in Phnom Penh. Asks: Now or before now? Present or Past? Students: Past! 3. Tells students to make 2 lists of the numbers only. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Grammar box

1. Tells students to look at the rules and discuss the answer with their partner. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 minute.

Activity 7: (2 mins) Grammar rule

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Share ideas.

Think.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work with a partner.

Write a-i/ remember what the woman says was in Phnom Penh.

Tick/cross.

Listen. Compare.

Share answers.

Look at the sentences.

Respond.

Make 2 lists of the numbers.

Check answers.

Look at the rules/discuss.

294

1. Comes back together as a class. Tells students you are going to read out some sentences. If they are from the past, they have to make a sound like an elephant. If they are from the present, they have to squawk like a bird.

1. Tells students to write about what they did when they were young. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 28 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (6 mins)

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

295

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past Unit 28: The swinging 60s Lesson B: The swinging 60s – The year is 2062 Pages: 172-173 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about and describing things that existed in the past. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe things that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes Today is (today‟s day and month) 20162. On the board. Asks students to work out how old they are. Can they still see? How old they feel? (Have fun! It‟s silly!)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (2 mins) Lead in

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Respond.

296

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) Lesson B: The swinging 60s â&#x20AC;&#x201C; The year is 2062

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. What can they see? Who are the people? What year is it in the picture? 2. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 3. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and read. Who are the people in the picture? 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking. Fingers Ready? Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Students compare their guess with their partner/group. 6. Checks the answer as a class. Tells students to turn to page 235 to check their guess!

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Writes What year is it? On the board. Asks students: is it 2015? Students: No! itâ&#x20AC;&#x;s 2062! 2. Asks students to point to the answer in the text. 3. Tells students to complete the rest of the questions in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (7 min) Students read for the answers

1. Writes on the board: Today is 1st-January-2062. Pretend to be old! Tells students how old you are. Asks students how old they are. 2. Tells students to make notes only about the questions in

Activity 4: (6 mins) Making notes

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture/respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen & read.

Compare.

Check.

Look at the board/respond.

Point to the answer in the text.

Complete.

Compare.

Check.

Look at the board/respond.

Make notes. 297

activity 4. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Tells students to compare their answers with their group/partner.

Compare.

Look at the board/respond.

Make notes.

Compare.

1. Writes on the board: Today is 1st-January-2062. Pretend to be old! Tells students how you felt in grade 7. Asks students how they felt in grade 7. 2. Tells students to make notes only about the questions in activity 4. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Tells students to compare their answers with their group/partner.

Activity 5: (6 mins) Making notes

1. Tells students they are going to write about their life now (in 2062) and their life long ago when they were a kid in grade 7. Tells students to follow the model of Dara. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Writing

Write about their lite.

1. Points to the date on the board. Asks: What year is it? Students: 2062! 2. Tells students that they are speaking to all their old school friends about their school days in grade 7. Asks is grade 7 the present or the past? Students: past! Asks: I am happy or I was happy? Students I was happy! 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 7: (5 mins) Post task

Look at the board/respond.

Talk about their school days.

Respond.

1. Asks some students from activity 5. 2. Are students answering in the past simple?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

298

1. Tells students to write about what they didn‟t do when they were young. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 28 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

299

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past Unit 28: The swinging 60s Lesson C: The swinging 60s – Sweet 60s songs Pages: 174-175 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about and describing things that existed in the past. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe things that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Writes: What I like about you is… on the board. 3. Asks students to help you finish the sentence about you! (e.g. What I like about you is you‟re a good teacher. OR what I like about you is you‟re funny. 4. Tells students they are going to say nice things about each person in the group for 30 seconds! Students have to finish the sentence What I like about you is…? With something true. 5. Tells students you are going to Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: What I like about you is

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

300

clap your hands at the end of the time and they need to change the person they are talking about. 6. Asks instruction checking questions.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) Lesson C: The swinging 60s â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Sweet 60s songs

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. What can they see? 2. Tells students to talk to their partner and guess who this is and what her job was. 3. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and read and check their guesses. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking. Fingers Ready? Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Students compare their guess with their partner/group. 6. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Writes: Was Phnom Penh the worst place in South East Asia? On the board. 2. Asks: Was Phnom Penh the worst place in South East Asia? Students: No! Tells students to point to the answer in the text. 3. Tells students to complete the rest of the questions in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of mins. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture/respond.

Talk/guess.

Compare.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen & read.

Compare.

Check.

Look at the board.

Respond.

Complete.

Compare.

Check. 301

1. Tells students to look at the picture and talk about the questions. 2. Puts students into pairs. 3. Tells students to decide who is student A and B. 4. Tells student As to raise their hands. 5. Tells student Bs to raise their hands. 6. Tells students they will have 2 mins to read about one of the people and then they will have to ask and answer questions with their partner. 7. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins. 8. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Speaking

1. Tells students to look at the pictures and talk. 2. Tells students to choose one of the pictures but not to tell their group! 3. Tells students to make notes about the questions. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 5: (7 mins) Making notes

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Tells students to take it in turns to speak about their person. Tells the group they can then ask extra questions. Can they guess which picture they are talking about? 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 6: (7 mins) Speaking

Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins) I can say what there was and wasnâ&#x20AC;&#x;t in the past. I can ask questions about what there was and wasnâ&#x20AC;&#x;t in the past.

Look at the picture/talk.

Work in pairs. Decide who is A/B.

Read & ask& answer.

Check.

Look at the pictures & talk.

Choose one of the pictures.

Make note.

Work in groups of 4. Take turns to speak.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare. Respond.

302

1. Tells students to write about the benefits of listening to songs. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 29 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

303

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past Unit 29: The good old days Lesson A: The good old days – When I was young Pages: 176-177 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what you did at the weekend and describing things you did / had when you were young. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they did at the weekend and describe things they did / had when they were young through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Asks students about their grandparents. (e.g. How old are they? When/Where they born). 2. Asks students what they think their grandparents did/didn‟t do when they were their age. 3. Tells students to work in pairs. Tells them to look at the photos in activity 1 for ideas. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Collects some ideas as a class. Asks students why they think so. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Activity 1: Lead in

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Respond.

Look at the photos.

Share ideas. 304

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) Lesson A: The good old days – When I was young

1. Tells students they are going to listen to Sophal‟s grandma talking about when she was young. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Asks students how many of their guesses are right.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to listen again and answer questions in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Tells students to compare with their classmates. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (7 min) Students listen for the answers

Whole class responds.

Listen carefully.

Talk about their guesses.

Listen & answer.

Compare.

Check.

Complete.

Guess/think about the rules.

Check.

5. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 6. Gets some answers from the class. 1. Tells students to complete the exercises in the grammar box in their notebooks. 2. Lets students think/guess the rules. 3. Asks questions to help students. 4. Gives a time limit of 7 mins. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Grammar box

1. Puts students into groups of 4/5. 2. Tells them to write 3 questions each to ask the teacher. These questions are about when you were young. Tells them to write their questions on pieces of paper. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 5: (3 mins) Writing

Work in groups of 4/5. Write 3 questions to ask the teacher.

1. Tells students to swap papers. 2. Tells each group to guess what the answers are to the other groups‟ questions. 3. Asks instruction checking

Activity 5: (3 mins) Speaking and guessing

Swap papers. Guess.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

305

questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 1. Writes When I was 6 years old… on the board. 2. Asks some questions about when you were 6 years old. Encourages students to guess the answers (e.g. Did I live in Phnom Penh when I was 6 years old?) 3. Tells students to complete the sentences in activity 6 about when you were 5 years old. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Writing

1. Tells students to put their pens down and look at you/the board. 2. Writes: Did you live…? On the board. Tells students to complete the question. 3. Points to activity 7 in the student‟s book and do the second question as a class. Writes the question on the board. 4. Tells students to complete the questions in their notebooks. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 7: (5 mins) Writing

1. Puts students in pairs. 2. Tells students to ask and answer questions about their childhood using the question in activity 7. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

1. Asks students some questions in activity 7. How many students did/liked/watched the same things?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Look at the board.

Respond.

Complete.

Listen carefully.

Complete.

Activity 8: (5 mins) Speaking

Work in pairs. Ask & answer.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Respond.

306

1. Tells students to write about one days of the week. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 29 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

307

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past Unit 29: The good old days Lesson B: The good old days – How was your weekend? Pages: 178-179 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what you did at the weekend and describing things you did / had when you were young. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they did at the weekend and describe things they did / had when they were young through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes: was/wasn‟t/were/weren‟t on the board. 2. Puts students into 4 groups. Assigns a word for each groups (i.e. group A – was, group B – wasn‟t, group C – were, group D – weren‟t). 3. Assigns gestures for each group (e.g. group A – stamp feet, group B – clap hands, group C – stand up, group D – say „hooray‟ 4. Tells students they are going to read a story, but there are gaps. 5. Tells students to complete the Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: was/were review

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

308

gaps with was, wasn‟t, were, weren‟t. they do this by doing the gestures assigned to their groups if they think their word fits (e.g. There ____ a boy. Group A stamp their feet). 6. Tells students to close their books. 7. Asks instruction checking questions. 8. Reads out texts from unit 28. Reads at a slightly slower pace and stops whenever you see was, wasn‟t, were, weren‟t. Lets the teams do the gestures for these words. 9. If two or more teams do their gestures, reads the sentence again. Then points to the team with the correct word. 10. Continues with 2 more short texts from the book until your time is up.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (44 mins) Lesson B: The good old days – How was your weekend?

1. Writes How was your weekend? On the board. 2. Collects some ideas from the class and writes some of their answers on the board. (don‟t write long sentences, just words or phrases). 3. Asks questions to help students. 4. Asks students to work in pairs and asks and answers questions about their weekend. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 6. Asks for some answers as a class.

Lead in: (5 mins)

1. Tells students to look at the picture in activity 1. 2. Tells them to guess what the pictures are in pairs. 3. Tells them to number the picture and write their guesses in their notebooks.

Activity 1: (5 mins) New words

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Start their work.

Whole class responds.

Look at the board.

Share ideas.

Ask & answer.

Share answers.

Look at the picture.

Guess.

Number the pictures.

309

4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Tells students to listen and check. Tells them to point to the pictures as they listen. 6. Tells students to listen and repeat. 1. Tells students that the pictures in activity 1 are all about Avorng‟s weekend. 2. Tells them to read the text quickly. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Asks: How was Avorng‟s weekend? Did he have a good weekend? Did he have a boring weekend? 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read for the big idea

1. Tells students to read the text again and complete the sentences in activity 3 in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partner/group. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (7 min) Students read for the answers

1. Tells students to close their books and look at you/the board. 2. Writes: Yesterday, I walk to school. Asks students if this is correct. Asks what is wrong. 3. Adds – ed to walk. Asks students if this is correct. Asks why. 4. Tells students that some words like cry change spelling when used in the past. 5. Tells students to open their books. Asks them to look how cry is spelt. 6. Tells them to write the past form of the rest of the verbs in their notebooks. 7. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 4: (4 mins) Grammar box

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Listen carefully.

Read the text.

Respond.

Check.

Read & complete.

Compare.

Check.

Look at the board.

Respond.

Change the verbs into past form.

Activity 5: (3 mins) Writing

310

8. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners. 9. Checks answers as a class.

Check.

Listen carefully/look at the board.

Listen & write.

Compare.

Listen again/compare.

Check.

Listen carefully.

Play the game.

1. Tells students that there are 3 ending sounds for past simple verbs. Writes them on the board. (/t/ /d/ /id/) 2. Tells students to listen and write the words in the correct column. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners. 4. Plays the recording again. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 5: (3 mins) Pronunciation

1. Tells students to close their books. Tells them to stand up. 2. Tells them you are going to say some words and that they have to do the corresponding action. /t/ - students sit down /d/ - students step forward /id/ - students step backwards 3. Practices with one or two words from the book. 4. Puts students into groups of 4/5. 5. Assigns a reader in each team. The reader reads out words from the book. 6. Other team members listen for the ending sounds and do the corresponding action. 7. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Stirrer. TPR game! (3 mins)

1. Puts students into pairs. 2. Tells students to write a conversation about their weekend. Tells them to use the text in activity 1 as an example. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Writing

Work in pairs. Write a conversation about the weekend.

1. Tells students to swap papers/notebooks with other pairs. 2. Tells students to practice the conversation in their pairs. 3. Asks instruction checking

Activity 7: (4 mins) Speaking

Swap papers/notebooks.

Practice the conversation.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

311

questions and gives a time limit of 30 seconds. 4. Tells students to swap papers again, students practice the conversation. Gives a time limit of 30 seconds. 5. Repeats until students have had 3/4 different conversations.

1. Asks some students what they did last weekend.

1. Tells students to write about what they did last weekend. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 29 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Swap papers/notebooks again/ practice the conversation.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

312

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past Unit 29: The good old days Lesson C: The good old days – The best holiday ever! Pages: 180-181 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about what you did at the weekend and describing things you did / had when you were young. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they did at the weekend and describe things they did / had when they were young through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students into groups of 3/4. 2. Tells students to look at you. 3. Tells them you are going to say a word silently. They will guess the word by looking at the movements of your mouth. 4. Says some words / phrases students know either from this unit or the previous ones.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Lip Reading

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

313

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about? 1. Tells students to look at you. Writes some examples of regular past simple verbs on the board (e.g. hated, liked, watched) 2. Asks students what these words have in common (-ed ending). Asks them why (theyâ&#x20AC;&#x;re written in their past simple forms). 3. Draws a timeline on the board like this: now

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson C: The good old days â&#x20AC;&#x201C; The best holiday ever! Activity 1: (5 mins) New words

4. Tells students that these verbs are used when talking about the past before now. 5. Tells them that we use some words to talk about the past too (e.g. yesterday, a long time ago, 3 days ago, last week) 6. Tells them to order and write the words on the timeline (i.e. a long time ago, last week, 3 days ago, yesterday, last night) in their notebooks. 7. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 8. Tells students to listen and check. 9. Tells students to listen and repeat. 1. Tells students to look at the photos in activity 2. Tells them that these kids went on holiday. 2. Tells students in each group to talk about who had a good holiday and a boring/not exciting holiday. Asks them why they think so. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Collects ideas from the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 2: (5 mins) Lead in and students guess

Whole class responds.

Look at the board.

Respond.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Look at the photos.

Talk.

Share ideas.

314

1. Tells students to listen and check. 2. Tells students to listen and match the pictures with the people. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (3 min) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to listen again and answer the questions in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners and gives a time limit of 1 minute. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Students listen for the answers

1. Puts students in groups of 3/4. 2. Talks about the last days of Chinedu and Chisum‟s holidays. What do they think made Chinedu cry on the last day? What made Chisum really happy? 3. Asks some students their ideas. 4. Tells students that that they are going to write the ending of each story. Tells them to write on pieces of paper. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins. 6. Tells students to compare their story endings with that at the back of the book.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Writing

1. Asks students to swap pieces of paper. 2. Tells them to read the other groups‟ writing and decide if they like the ending or not. Students put a smiley face if the like the ending. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 minute. 4. Then asks students to swap papers again. Continue until each group has read all the other groups‟ writing.

Activity 6: (6 mins) Speaking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Listen & check.

Listen & match.

Check.

Listen & answer.

Compare.

Check.

Work in groups of 3/4.

Share ideas. Write the ending story.

Compare.

Swap pieces of paper.

Read the other groups‟ writing.

Swap again.

315

2. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 3. Compare with a partner. 4. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

1. Tells students to write about a good holiday. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 30 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins) I can talk about when I was young. I can talk about what I did at the weekend. I can ask and answer questions about when I was young. I can write an ending to a story. I can say some words that end with /t/ /d/ /id/.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare. Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

316

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past Unit 30: Cool memories Lesson A: Cool memories – What happened, really? Pages: 182-183 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about things that happened and existed in the past. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened and existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Says a sentence (e.g. Yesterday, I walked to school.) 2. Have another student says your sentence and add his/her sentence (e.g. Yesterday, Miss Mom walked to school. I cooked dinner.) 3. Calls another student to say both sentences and add his/her sentence (e.g. Yesterday, Miss Mom walked to school. I cooked dinner and Sophal helped his mum.) 4. Tells students they are going to play the same game in big Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Play sentence relay

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

317

6. 7. 8.

groups. Tells them they canâ&#x20AC;&#x;t write. They have to remember sentences without writing. Puts students into 2 groups. Puts them in a circle. Students take it in turns to say a sentence, one sentence building from the other, until the last student has said everybodyâ&#x20AC;&#x;s sentence.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson A: Cool memories â&#x20AC;&#x201C; What happened, really?

1. Tells students to look at the picture in activity 1. Asks: What happened? (Arunny is missing.) 2. Tells students to guess what happened to Arunny with their partners. Did somebody take her? Who took her? 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 minute. 4. Collects ideas from the class.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students to listen and check their guesses. 2. Asks: Did you guess right? Who took Arunny? 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to listen again. They tick and cross the sentences in activity 3. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners/groups. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (7 min) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to complete the exercises in the grammar box. 2. Lets students guess/think about the rules. 3. Asks questions to help students. 4. Gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. Tells students to listen and check.

Activity 4: (8 mins) Grammar box

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture/respond.

Guess what happened.

Listen & check.

Respond.

Check.

Tick/cross.

Compare.

Check.

Complete.

Guess/think about the rules.

Listen & check. 318

6. Checks answers as a class.

Check.

Look at the board.

Guess.

Tick/cross.

Write true/false sentences about them.

Swap papers/notebooks.

Work in pairs.

Guess true/false.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

1. Writes one true and one false sentence about you on the board. (e.g. I liked walking when I was 3 years old.) 2. Tells students to guess which is true and which is false. 3. Puts a tick next to the true sentence and cross next to the false sentence. 4. Tells students that they are going to write true/false sentences about them. 5. Tells them to write the sentences in their notebooks. 6. Asks instruction checking question and gives a time limit of 6 mins.

Activity 5: (8 mins) Writing

1. Tells students to swap papers/notebooks. 2. Puts students in pairs. 3. Tells them to guess which of their friendâ&#x20AC;&#x;s sentences are true/false. They put a tick or a cross next to the sentences. 4. Tells students to find out if their guesses were correct by asking their partners questions. Tells them to record their scores. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 6: (7 mins) Speaking

1. Asks students how many of their guesses were right. 2. Checks studentsâ&#x20AC;&#x; pronunciation as a class.

1. Tells students to write about one thing they still remember. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 30 on page 209 in the studentâ&#x20AC;&#x;s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins)

319

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

320

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past Unit 30: Cool memories Lesson B: Cool memories – All about dinos! Pages: 184-185 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about things that happened and existed in the past. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened and existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Asks some students what they did yesterday. Writes some of their answers on the board. 2. Puts students into groups of 5/6. Tells them to sit in circles. 3. Tells each group to have a pen / pencil ready. 4. Tells each group that they are going to ask and answer questions about what they did yesterday / last night / last week. 5. One student spins the pen. Whoever the pen points to ask a question (e.g. Did you go swimming yesterday? The Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Play „Spin the pen‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

321

student chooses one person in the group to answer the questions. 6. Corrects studentsâ&#x20AC;&#x; mistakes.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (46 mins) Lesson B: Cool memories â&#x20AC;&#x201C; All about dinos!

1. Tells students to look at the photos in activity 1. 2. Tells students to guess what the photos are of with their partner. 3. Tells them to number the photos in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Tells students to compare with their partners/groups. 6. Tells students to listen and check. 7. Tells students to listen and repeat.

Activity 1: (5 mins) New words

1. Tells students to look at the pictures in activity 2. 2. Tells them to guess what the pictures are of. 3. Tells students to talk to their partners and guess. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Collects ideas from the class.

Activity 2: (2 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students the pictures are of dinosaurs. Tells them to talk about what they know about dinosaurs. 2. Gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Collects ideas from the class. 4. Tells students to read and check their guesses. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students read for the big idea

1. Tells students to read again and answers the questions in activity 4. 2. Asks instruction checking

Activity 4: (7 mins) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the photos.

Guess.

Number the photos.

Compare.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Look at the pictures.

Guess.

Talk & guess.

Share ideas.

Listen & talk about what they know about dinosaurs.

Share ideas. Read & check.

Read & answer.

322

questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partner/groups. 4. Checks answers as a class. 1. Draws a dinosaur on the board like this:

Activity 5: (7 mins) Game! Draw the dinosaurs!

2. Tells students that the dinosaur is missing some body parts. They will draw the missing body parts. 3. Puts students into 4 groups. 4. Asks one student from each team to come to the front. Blindfold one student or have him / her close his/her eyes. No cheating! No peeping! 5. Says: draw the eyes (nose, legs, feet, tail, ears, etc.) 6. Tells each group to direct their group mate. They tell him/her where to draw by giving instructions such as move to the right, left, go up, go down, etc.) You might want to write these phrases on the board. 7. Continues until the time is up. Asks some questions about the studentsâ&#x20AC;&#x; dinosaur (e.g. where are the teeth?). Asks them to give a name for this dinosaur. 1. Puts students in pairs. 2. Asks student A to turn to page 236. Asks student B to turn to page 240. 3. Tells students NOT to show their text their partners. Tell them their texts are secret. 4. Tells student A to read his/her text to his/her partner. Tells student B to look at her/his text and correct the mistakes. There are 4 mistakes. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 6. Tells students to swap roles. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 6: (8 mins) Listening and Speaking

Compare.

Check.

Look at the board.

Listen carefully.

Work in 4 groups.

Start their work.

Work in pairs. Listen carefully.

Read their texts.

Swap roles. 323

Student B reads his/her text. Student A listens and corrects the mistakes in his/her text. 7. Tells students to compare their texts. Did they find all the mistakes? 1. Asks students what they would like to know about dinosaurs. 2. Writes some of their answers on the board. Don‟t write the complete sentences. 3. Tells them to write 3 questions about dinosaurs in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 5. Tells students to compare their notes. Can they answer their classmates‟ questions?

1. Asks some students their questions. Answers some of the questions, if you can. 2. Tells them to answer at least one of their classmates‟ questions for homework.

1. Tells students to write about one animal they know and like most. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 30 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Compare.

Respond.

Write 3 questions about dinosaurs.

Compare.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Activity 7: (7 mins) Writing

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

324

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past Unit 30: Cool memories Lesson C: Cool memories – All about cavemen! Pages: 186-187 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about things that happened and existed in the past. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened and existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. The teacher whispers a word to a student on the first row. 2. The student in turn, whispers to the next student, until the last student at the end of the row. 3. The last student either shouts the word or writes it on the board. Tip: students could be asked to stand in line.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Play „Whisper‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game.

325

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson C: Cool memories â&#x20AC;&#x201C; All about cavemen!

1. Tells students to look at the picture in activity 1. 2. Tells students to work in pairs. Tells them to guess what the pictures are of and find them in the pictures. 3. Tells them to number the pictures in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Tells students to listen and check. 6. Tells students to listen and repeat.

Activity 1: (5 mins) New words

1. Tells students that this girl lived a long, long time ago. 2. Tells students to talk with their partners. Ask: what did she have? What didnâ&#x20AC;&#x;t she have? What did she do? What didnâ&#x20AC;&#x;t she do? Did she have toys? Did she have a computer? Did she brush her hair? 3. Tells students to draw a concept map in their notebooks similar to the one in activity 2 and write their ideas. Tells them not to write complete sentences. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Collects ideas from the class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students to read the text quickly and check their guesses. How many of their guesses were correct? 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners/groups. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (4 min) Students read for the big idea

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Look at the pictures. Work in pairs/guess what the pictures are of.

Number the pictures.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Listen carefully.

Talk with their partners.

Draw a concept map.

Share ideas.

Read & check.

Compare.

Check.

326

1. Tells students to read the text again and answer the questions in activity 4. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners/groups. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (6 mins) Students read for the answers

1. Writes now and 15,000 years ago. Asks students if Amika‟s life was different or the same as theirs (different). 2. Asks some things which are different. Writes ideas on the board. (e.g. Amika didn‟t have a house. I have a house. 3. Puts students in groups of 3/4. 4. Tells them to write some more differences between now and 15,000 years ago. 5. Tells them to write on pieces of paper. Tells them to draw some pictures too. 6. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Writing

Activity 6: (8 mins) Speaking

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins) I can talk about what people did a long time ago. I can ask questions about what people did a long time ago.

Read & answer.

Compare.

Check.

Look at the board/respond.

Respond.

Work in groups of 3/4. Write some more differences.

Write on pieces of paper.

One student from each team to be the reporter & report. Talk about their work.

Respond.

Compare.

Respond.

327

1. Tells students to write about what you did when you were in grade 6. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 31 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

328

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 11: I can remember everything Unit 31: What happened? Lesson A: What happened? - Weird weekend? Pages: 188-189 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing and recalling a memory. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and recall a memory through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students into groups of 4. 2. Write: What‟s your favourite thing to do on the weekend? On the board. 3. Tells students to talk about their ideas. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Gets some answers from the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (3 mins) Lead in

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Work in groups of 4. Look at the board.

Talk.

Share ideas.

329

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (36 mins) Lesson A: What happened? â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Weird weekend?

1. Tells students to look at the picture in activity. What can they see? 2. Asks students What is happening? 3. Asks students Why? 4. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 5. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write 1-7 in their notebooks. Tells them to try and remember/guess the answer. 3. Tells them to listen and write the answers next to the numbers in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students listen and check. 6. Students compare with their group/partner. 7. Asks for some answers as a class.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students listen for the answers

1. Tells students to look at the picture of Nika. Asks How old is she? 2. Tells students they are going to read about Nika very quickly and find out why last weekend was special. Tells students when they think they know to put up their hand. 3. Asks instruction checking

Activity 4: (3 mins) Students look at a model

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work with a partner.

Write 1-7/remember/guess.

Write the answers next to the numbers.

Listen & check. Compare.

Share answers.

Look at the picture of Nika.

Read about Nika/respond.

330

questions and gives a time limit of 1 minute. 4. Asks and answers as a class.

Ask & answer.

Work with a partner.

Discuss what Nika would answer to the questions.

Ask & answer.

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to discuss what Nika would answer to the questions. 3. Tells students they don‟t need to write. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Asks and answers as a class.

Activity 5: (5 mins) Students discuss a model

1. Tells students to use the questions in activity 5 to make notes about their own Sunday. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit o f 3 mins.

Activity 6: (4 mins) Students make notes

Use the questions in activity 5 to make notes about their own Sunday.

1. Tells students to write about their own weekend. They can use the model for help. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Tells students to read their writing in groups.

Activity 7: (7 mins) Students write

Write about their own weekend.

Read their writing in groups.

Share their writing.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Asks some students to share their writing with the class.

1. Tells students to write about what you did on last Saturday. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 31 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

331

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 11: I can remember everything Unit 31: What happened? Lesson B: What happened? - It was the scariest thing ever! Pages: 190-191 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing and recalling a memory. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and recall a memory through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students into groups of 4. 2. Write: What I like about is… on the board. 3. Asks students to help you finish the sentence about you! (e.g. What I like about you is you‟re a good teacher.) 4. Tells students they are going to say nice things about each person in the group for 30 seconds! Students have to finish the sentence What I like about you is with something true. 5. Asks instruction checking questions. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: What I like about you is

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Work in groups of 4. Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

Play the game. 332

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) Lesson B: What happened? – It was the scariest thing ever!

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Tells students to look at the pictures, cover today‟s text and guess today‟s story. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 4. Gets some ideas from the class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) New words/Lead in

1. Asks students to look at the picture and cover the text. What can they see? 2. Asks students How does the boy feel? Why? 3. Tells students to compare their ideas with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 2: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students they are going to listen and read and check their guesses. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Fingers Ready? Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students to compare their answer with their group/partner. 6. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Do the first question together as a class. Have students point to where the answer is in the text. 2. Tells students to do the other questions in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Students complete. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Students read for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Whole class responds.

Work in groups of 4. Look at the pictures/respond.

Share ideas.

Look at the picture.

Respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen & read.

Compare.

Check.

Do the first question as a class.

Do the other questions.

Complete. Compare.

Check.

333

1. Books closed. Writes Are you scared of ghosts? On the board. Asks some students around the room. Asks why? 2. Tells students to work with a partner and talk about things in the pictures one by one. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Comes together as a class. Say: Put your hand up if youâ&#x20AC;&#x;re scared of ghosts!

Activity 5: (7 mins) Post task/Brainstorming

1. Tells students to work by themselves. Tells students to talk about a time they were really scared. They can use an idea from the last activity, or something else. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 1. Tells students to work in groups and take it in turns to tell their friends their scary story. Students should listen and ask follow up questions. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

1. Asks one person in each group to take it in turns reading out their scary stories to the class. 2. Have a class vote on the scariest story.

1. Tells students to write about what you scare most. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 31 on page 209 in the studentâ&#x20AC;&#x;s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Respond.

Talk.

Respond.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Note taking/Getting ready to talk

Talk about a time they were really scared.

Activity 7: (8 mins) Freer speaking practice

Tell the class their scary story.

Read their scariest story.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

334

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

335

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 11: I can remember everything Unit 31: What happened? Lesson C: What happened? - They‟re important to me Pages: 192-193 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Describing and recalling a memory. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and recall a memory through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Uses the board eraser or a pencil case. Asks: What is it? Talks into like a phone. Students: It‟s a phone. 2. Tells students that they are going to play the game in their groups. 3. Rules: you get a point if your friends can guess what you are pretending the eraser is. But all the members lose a point if they can‟t guess. The person with the eraser is not allowed to talk. The group must speak in English! Some ideas: an egg, a bird, a cat, a pen, a notebook, lunch, an Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: Pass the eraser

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Work in groups of 4. Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

336

apple, an orange, a friend, a game. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson C: What happened? â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Theyâ&#x20AC;&#x;re important to me

1. Tells students to look at the pictures. What can they see? 2. Tells students not to read the text. But try to match the words in the box with the photos. 3. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and read and check their guesses. 2. Tells students to read along with their finger. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. Says: Fingers ready? Plays the recording. 4. Students listen and read along with their fingers. 5. Tells students to compare their answer with their group/partner. 6. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students read and listen for the big idea

1. Do the first question together as a class. Have students point to where the answer is in the text. 2. Tells students to do the other questions in their notebooks. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Students complete. 5. Students compare with their group/partner. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students read for the answers

1. Puts students in pairs. Tells them to ask and answer the questions. They should ask one follow up question after each answer. 2. Asks instruction checking

Activity 4: (3 mins) Post task/Personalisation

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the pictures/respond.

Match the words with the photos.

Compare.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen & read.

Compare.

Check.

Do the first question as a class.

Do the other questions.

Complete. Compare.

Check.

Work in pairs/ask & answer.

337

questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students that they donâ&#x20AC;&#x;t have to write. 3. Tells students that they are going to give them 3 mins to read the model and find the answers to the questions. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners. 6. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 5: (4 mins) Students look at a model

Work with a partner.

Read the model.

Compare.

Ask & answer.

1. Tells students to think about their answers to the questions in activity 5and to write notes in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Taking notes

Think about the answers to the questions.

1. Tells students to ask and answer questions with a partner and to ask one follow up question. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins.

Activity 7: (3 mins) Comparing ideas with a partner

Ask & answer.

1. Tells students to use their notes to write about someone who is important to them. They should include the answer to the question their partner asked. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 6 mins.

Activity 8: (7 mins) Writing

Write about someone who is important.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare.

Respond.

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins) I can talk/say what I did on the weekend. I can talk about a time I was really scared. I can talk about someone who is important to me.

338

Step V: Closing (2 mins) 1. Tells students to write about why Homework: their parents are important to them. 2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: list for unit 32 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Listen and take note of the homework.

Listen and take note.

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

339

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 11: I can remember everything Unit 32: Is that really real? Lesson A: Is that really real? – That never happened! Pages: 194-195 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Giving and following directions. ~ Talking about what you are doing now. ~ Talking about things that existed in the past. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to give and follow directions and introduce what you‟re doing now & things that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes some first meeting vocab on the board. E.g. Hi. How are you? How are you? What‟s your name? 2. Tells students to stand up. (you can have students work in groups if it is too small to have students walking around the room). 3. Tells students that they are going to do a get to know you role play. Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: Feeling greetings

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

340

4. Have students do the activity once normally. 5. Tells students to choose a different partner, but this time they have just found out that they lost their telephone! How do they feel? Tells students to have the conversation with this feeling. 6. Keeps changing the situation (and partners!). Dog is dead. You have a million dollars! Etc.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) Lesson A: Is that really real? â&#x20AC;&#x201C; That never happened!

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? How many things can they name? 2. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 3. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Students remember / Lead in

1. Asks students what they think Bopha will say about Daraâ&#x20AC;&#x;s picture? 2. Tells students to talk to their partner for a minute. 3. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Students listen. 6. Tells students to compare with their partner / group. 7. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to try and remember/guess the things that Bopha says about Daraâ&#x20AC;&#x;s picture. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Tells students to listen and check. 5. Tells students to compare with their group/partner. 6. Asks and answers questions as a class.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture/respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

Respond.

Talk to their partner.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work in pairs.

Remember/guess.

Listen & check.

Compare.

Ask & answer. 341

1. Tells students to look at the picture and see how many more things they can see. Tells students to write full sentences in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Tells students to compare with their group/partner. 4. Asks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Post task

1. Tells students to look at the pictures and talk to their partner about which of the things they have in their house. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Gets answers from the class.

Activity 5: (3 mins) Review vocab

1. Tells students to write sentences about what they had and what they didn‟t have 50 years ago. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 4 mins. 1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Tells students to discuss the questions in their groups. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 7 mins.

1. Asks some students their ideas. Are students using the past simple? 2. Are students using auxiliary verbs correctly?

1. Tells students to write about one real thing they met in the past. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 32 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Look at the picture.

Compare.

Share answers.

Look at the pictures/talk.

Share answers.

Activity 6: (5 mins) Writing

Write sentences about what they had/didn‟t have 50 years ago.

Activity 7: (8 mins) Freer practice

Work in groups of 4. Discuss the questions.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

342

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

343

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 11: I can remember everything Unit 32: Is that really real? Lesson B: Is that really real? – Paper Fortune Tellers Pages: 196-197 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Giving and following directions. ~ Talking about what you are doing now. ~ Talking about things that existed in the past. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to give and follow directions and introduce what you‟re doing now & things that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Step II: Warmer/Review (10 mins) Warmer: Game! Buzz

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

344

5. Puts students in groups of 4/5. 6. Writes another number on the board. 7. In groups, students take turns counting up one number at a time, but for any multiple of that number, they say „buzz‟.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about? 1. Tells students to look at the questions and see if they know the game in the picture. If they don‟t know, guess. 2. Tells students to compare with their partner. 3. Checks the answer as a class.

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) Lesson B: Is that really real? – Paper Fortune Tellers Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in

1. Asks students what they think the paper fortune teller will tell Linda. 2. Gets some ideas from the class. 3. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Students listen. 6. Tells students to compare with their partner/group. 7. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write 1-8 in their notebooks. Tells students to try and remember/guess the answers to the questions. 3. Tells them to listen and write the answers next to the numbers in their notebooks. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 5. Students listen and check. 6. Tells students to compare their answers with their partner/group. 7. Asks for some answers as a class.

Activity 3: (10 min) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture/guess.

Compare.

Check the answer.

Listen carefully.

Share ideas.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work in pairs.

Write 1-8/remember/guess.

Listen carefully.

Listen & check. Compare.

Share answers.

345

1. Put students in groups of 4. Tells students to choose one person to be the writer. 2. Reads the instruction as a class. What do you think she wanted to see? Gets some ideas from the class. (e.g. You are beautiful. You are nice. Etc.) 3. Asks students to brainstorm as many things as they can that can go in the paper fortune tellers. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 5. Gets some ideas from the class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Brainstorming

1. Tells students to follow the instructions to make their own paper fortune tellers. Students can work alone or with a partner. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 1. Tells students to go around the room and play the paper fortune tellers. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 1.

Asks some questions from today‟s lesson. (e.g. What‟s your name? how old are you?)

1. Asks students: „Do they believe in Fortune Teller?‟ why or why not? 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 32 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Work in groups of 4.

Listen carefully.

Brainstorm.

Share ideas.

Activity 5: (7 mins) Reading

Make their own paper fortune tellers.

Activity 6: (7 mins) Speaking

Go around the room & play the paper fortune tellers.

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

346

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 11: I can remember everything Unit 32: Is that really real? Lesson C: Is that really real? – Getting in trouble at home Pages: 198-199 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Giving and following directions. ~ Talking about what you are doing now. ~ Talking about things that existed in the past. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to give and follow directions and introduce what you‟re doing now & things that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

Step II: Warmer/Review (6 mins) Warmer: Game! What are you doing?

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

347

until student 3 asks What are you doing? Student 2 doesn‟t say flying. They say a different ing action. 6. Continues until all students have had a turn. It‟s really funny! (if you have a very large class, just point to some people. )

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson C: Is that really real? – Getting in trouble at home

1. Puts students in groups of 4. 2. Books closed. Do your parents leave you alone sometimes? Are you good or naughty when they are away? 3. Tells students to discuss the questions in their groups. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 5. Asks some students their answers.

Activity 1: (3 mins) Lead in

1. Asks students to look at the picture. What can they see? 2. Asks students Do you think Dara is being good or naughty? Why? 3. Tells students to compare with their partner for a minute. 4. Gets some answers from the class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students guess

1. Tells students that they are going to listen and check their guesses. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Students listen. 4. Tells students to compare with their partner/group. 5. Checks the answer as a class.

Activity 2: (5 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to work with a partner. 2. Tells students to write 1-8 in their notebooks. Tells students to try to remember/guess the answers. 3. Tells students to listen and write the answers next to the numbers

Activity 3: (10 min) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Work in groups of 4. Listen carefully.

Discuss.

Share ideas.

Look at the picture.

Think/respond.

Compare.

Share answers.

Listen carefully.

Listen. Compare.

Check.

Work with a partner.

Write 1-8/remember/guess.

Listen & write. 348

5. 6. 7.

in their notebooks. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. Students listen and check. Tells students to compare with their partner/group. Gets some ideas from the class.

1. Tells students to work with their partner. 2. Tells students to discuss the questions in their groups. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 4. Gets some ideas from the class.

Activity 4: (3 mins) Post task

1. Tells students to talk to their partners, and match the words with the pictures. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 5: (3 mins) Revision

1. Tells students to work in pairs. Tells students to decide who is student A and who is student B. 2. Tells students As to puts their hands up, and tells student B to put their hands up. 3. Tells students that their partner has a picture of the bedroom they need to draw and they have to use questions with Where is the___ and then draw them in their pictures.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Speaking

1. Tells student As to turn to page 236 and student Bs turn to page 240. 2. Asks instruction checking questions.

Activity 7: (2 mins)

1. Asks students to look at the can do statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the can do statements.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (3 mins) I can talk about what people did and didnâ&#x20AC;&#x;t do in the past. I can make a paper fortune teller. I can draw where things are in a bedroom.

Listen & check. Compare.

Share ideas.

Work with their partner.

Discuss the questions.

Share ideas.

Talk/match.

Check.

Work in pairs.

Listen carefully.

Draw the bedroom.

Listen carefully.

Look at the can do statements.

Compare. Respond.

349

1. Asks students to draw a picture of their living room. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 33 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

350

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 11: I can remember everything Unit 33: More questions Lesson A: More questions – Silly questions! Pages: 200-201 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about things that happened in the past and present. ~ Talking about your most memorable day in grade 7. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened in the past and present & their most memorable day in grade 7 through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Writes a word on the board (e.g. small). 2. Asks: What small things can you think of? (e.g. pencil, pen, rat, paper). 3. Tells students they are going to play the same game in groups. 4. Puts students in groups of 5/6. 5. Assigns a writer in each group. 6. Asks a question / writes on the board. (e.g. red, square, bigger than the teacher, yellow) 7. In groups, students write down Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (7 mins) Warmer: How many things can you think of?

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

351

as many things as they can think of that are red, square, bigger that the teacher, yellow, etc. 8. Gives a time limit of 1 minute for each word or phrase. 9. The group with the most number of words wins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) Lesson A: More questions – Silly questions!

1. Writes Silly questions on the board. 2. If students don‟t already know what silly means, encourages them to guess by giving some examples. 3. Asks some silly questions (e.g. Why have you got black hair? Why do we have 10 fingers? Why can‟t people fly? Why are there black and white bears? Why is my sister naughty?) writes some of these on the board. 4. Tells students that younger children usually ask silly questions. Tells them to look at Arunny‟s picture in activity 1. She is asking silly questions to her dad, Avorng. 5. Tells students to guess what Arunny‟s questions are in pairs / groups. 6. Tells them to use a concept map like the one in the book. Tells them to draw a concept map in their notebooks. 7. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 3 mins. 8. Collects ideas from the class.

Activity 1: (8 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students to listen and check their guesses. 2. Tells them to compare their answers with their partners / groups. 3. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students listen for the big idea

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the board.

Listen carefully.

Listen & look at the Arunny‟s picture.

Guess.

Draw a concept map.

Share ideas.

Listen & check.

Compare.

Check.

352

1. Tells students to listen again and tick the pictures that Arunny asks about. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners / groups. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students listen for the answers

1. Writes a computer on the board. Tells students that they are computers. What questions do / can they ask? 2. Collects some ideas from students. Writes some of their ideas on the board. (e.g. what colour am I? why don‟t have legs / hands?) 3. Tells them they are something else (e.g. a mobile phone, an elephant, a pen, a school, a house, etc.) tells them to choose what they are. 4. Tells students to write 2 silly questions to ask people. 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Writing

1. Tells students to walk around and ask their questions. 2. Tells them to ask 5 different people in the class. Tells them NOT to write. They have to remember their classmate‟s answers. 3. Asks: Who asked the silliest question? Who gave the silliest answer? 4. Writes some of the students‟ answers on the board.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Speaking

1. Puts students into 3 groups. 2. Tells group 1 to write 3 question words in their notebooks / a piece of paper (e.g. why, what, when). Tells them to number the words. 3. Tells group 2 to write 3 action words in their notebooks / a piece of paper (e.g. eat, drink, write). Tells them to number the

Activity 6: (8 mins) Stirrer – more silly questions

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Listen & tick.

Compare.

Check.

Look at the board.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully / respond.

Write 2 silly questions.

Ask their questions.

Ask 5 different people.

Respond.

Work in 3 groups. Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

353

5. 6.

7. 8.

words. Tells group 3 to write 3 names of people / things (e.g. Dara, a lion, a pen) Asks instruction checking questions. Shouts out a number (e.g. group 1 – number 2, group 2 – number 2, group 3 – number 1). Writes the words on the board (e.g. what, drink, Dara). Tells each group to make the sentence. The first group to make the sentence wins (e.g. What does Dara drink?)

1. Asks some students to answer some questions from activity 6.

1. Asks students to make 5 silly questions about themselves. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 33 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

354

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 11: I can remember everything Unit 33: More questions Lesson B: More questions – Cool superheroes! Pages: 202-203 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about things that happened in the past and present. ~ Talking about your most memorable day in grade 7. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened in the past and present & their most memorable day in grade 7 through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Puts students into 2 teams. 2. Reads an easy text out of the book using a funny voice from one feeling (e.g. Read a text crying!) 3. Asks students: How do I feel? Students: sad! 4. Tells students they are going to play a game. They are going to have one team member at the front of the class reading out a text with a feeling. Whoever guesses the feeling first gets a Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: „Say it with feeling!‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

355

point. 5. Chooses 2 team members to come to the front of the class. Gives them a text (from the book) to read. 6. First team to guess gets a point! Asks instruction checking questions.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) Lesson B: More questions â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Cool superheroes!

1. Tells students to look at the pictures in activity 1. 2. In pairs, tells students to guess who they are. What can they do? What canâ&#x20AC;&#x;t they do? 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 mins. 4. Collects ideas from the class.

Activity 1: (2 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students to match the words with the pictures in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking question and gives a time limit of 2 mins. 3. Tells students to listen and check. 4. Tells students to listen and repeat.

Activity 2: (3 mins) New words

1. Tells students they are going to read about a superhero. 2. Tells them to guess what special powers the superhero has in pairs. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 1 minute. 4. Collects ideas from the class. 5. Tells students to read quickly and find out if their guesses were correct. 6. Checks answers as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Activity 3: (5 min) Students read for the big idea

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the picture.

Guess.

Share ideas.

Match the words with the pictures.

Listen & check.

Listen & repeat.

Listen carefully.

Guess.

Share ideas. Read.

Check.

356

1. Tells students to read the text again and answer the questions in their notebooks. 2. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners/groups. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 4: (7 mins) Students read for the answers

1. Puts students into groups of 3/4. 2. Tells students that they are going to write and draw their own superhero. 3. Tells them to write a fact file of their superheroes in their notebooks / pieces of paper. Tells them to use the ideas in activity 5. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 5: (10 mins) Writing

1. Chooses one student from each team to report about their work. 2. Calls each reporter in front of the class. Tells them to talk about their work for 1 minute. 3. Asks the other students to think of one question for the reporting team. Reminds them to listen to others. 4. Displays some of the studentsâ&#x20AC;&#x; work. 5. Have a class vote to see which of the pictures students like best.

Activity 6: (7 mins) Speaking

1. Tells each group to choose one superhero that the other groups wrote / drew. 2. Tells them to write 3 questions to ask the superhero. 3. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins. 4. Choose one student in each group to be the superhero. 5. Tells students to take it in turns to ask their questions. Encourages the superheroes of each team to give silly answers.

Activity 7: (9 mins) Speaking â&#x20AC;&#x201C; role play

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Listen carefully.

Compare.

Check.

Work in groups of 3/4. Write & draw their own superheroes.

Use the ideas in activity 5.

Choose on student from each team to report their work. Talk about their work for 1 minute.

Think of 1 question to ask.

Display their work.

Have a class vote!

Listen carefully.

Write 3 questions to ask the superhero.

Choose 1student to be the superhero. Take turns to ask questions.

357

1. Asks some students their favourite superheroes. 2. If they haven‟t finished, tells them to continue drawing / writing / colouring their superheroes for homework.

1. Asks students to draw and color a superhero they like most. 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 33 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (2 mins)

Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Reminders:

Listen and take note of the homework. Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

358

Lesson Plan I.

Grade 7: Chapter 11: I can remember everything Unit 33: More questions Lesson C: More questions – My best memories Pages: 204-205 Duration: 50 mins Aim: ~ Talking about things that happened in the past and present. ~ Talking about your most memorable day in grade 7. II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened in the past and present & their most memorable day in grade 7 through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately. III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activity

Student’s Activity

Contents Step I: Opening (2 mins) Greeting

2. Checks attendance: - How many students are absent today?

Attendant record

2. Individual/ class monitor reports students who are absent today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Which group is in charge of cleaning the class today?

Praise or give advice

3. Individual/ class monitor reports the group that‟s in charge of cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on the whiteboard: - What day is it today? - What is the date?

The date:_________________

4. Whole class/individual responds:

1. Greets the whole class: -

Good morning everyone!

1. Tells students to ask you any questions they want. Answers each question with Banana-na without pausing! Hold as long as you can. Answers 2 questions like this. 2. Tells students that they are going to play this game in groups. 3. Tells students to work in groups and choose one person to be „it‟. 4. The student has to answer 2 questions with Banana-na. They cannot laugh or pause. If they Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Step II: Warmer/Review (5 mins) Warmer: „Banana-na‟

1. Whole class stands up & greets back: - Good morning teacher!

Today is:___________________ The date is:_________________

Listen carefully and raise questions if they have any.

359

can answer each question with Banana-na without breaking, they get 5 points. If the group makes them laugh, they get one point. 5. Asks instruction checking questions.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new lesson on the board. What is the title about?

Step III: Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) Lesson C: More questions â&#x20AC;&#x201C; My best memories

1. Tells students to look at the pictures in activity 1. Tells them each picture shows a memorable event. 2. Writes memorable on the board. Asks questions to help students understand what it means (e.g. when something is memorable, do we forget easily? Do we remember?) 3. Tells students to talk about the pictures in pairs. 4. Asks instruction checking questions. 5. Collects ideas from students.

Activity 1: (5 mins) Lead in

1. Tells students that they are going to listen to the most memorable days in grade 7 of Sophal, Dara, Bopha and Avorng. 2. Tells students to listen and point to the pictures of the characters as they listen. 3. Asks instruction checking questions. 4. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners / groups. 5. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 2: (3 mins) Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to listen again and answer the questions. 2. Asks instruction checking questions. 3. Tells students to compare their answers with their partners / groups. 4. Checks answers as a class.

Activity 3: (5 min) Students listen for the answers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Play the game.

Whole class responds.

Look at the pictures.

Guess.

Work in pairs/ Talk about the pictures.

Share ideas.

Listen carefully.

Listen & point to the pictures of the characters.

Compare.

Check.

Listen again & answer.

Compare.

Check.

360

1. Tells students to write about their most memorable day in grade 7 on pieces of paper. 2. Tells them NOT to write their names on their paper. 3. If necessary, gives them time to read the tapescript quickly to get some ideas. 4. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Activity 4: (10 mins) Writing

1. Collects the papers from each student. 2. Tells students that you are going to give them their classmateâ&#x20AC;&#x;s writing. 3. Tells them to look for the writer by asking questions (e.g. Who is your best friend? Did you get 100% in your English test?) 4. Gives the paper back to the students. Make sure students do not get their own papers! 5. Asks instruction checking questions and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Activity 5: (7 mins) Speaking

1. Writes I like you becauseâ&#x20AC;Ś on the board. 2. Asks some students to complete the sentence about their classmate / best friend / teacher. 3. Tells them to write short sentences like this about their classmates. Tells them to write on small pieces of paper. 4. Tells them to write as many people as they like. 5. Asks instruction checking questions (e.g. Are we writing good things or bad things?) and gives a time limit of 7 mins. 6. Tells students to go around and give their notes to their classmates. 7. Asks who has the most number of notes. 8. Asks some students to read some of the notes they received in front of the class.

Activity 6: (10 mins) Writing

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

Write about their most memorable day in grade 7.

NOT to write their names on their paper! Read the tapescript to gets some ideas.

Give the papers to the teacher.

Listen carefully.

Look for the writer.

Look at the board.

Complete.

Write short sentences.

Write as many people as they like.

Give their notes to their classmates.

Respond.

Read their notes.

361

1. Asks students to look at the „can do‟ statements. 2. Compare with a partner. 3. Asks students how they feel about the „can do‟ statements.

1. Asks students to write as many sentences as they can with I like my parents because … 2. Tells students to read the word list for unit 33 on page 209 in the student‟s book. 3. Says goodbye to the class.

Step IV: Learner assessment and lesson wrap up (5 mins) I can ask and answer questions about people do every day. I can write a short story about my most memorable day. I can remember some words and stories from the book.

Respond.

Compare. Respond.

Step V: Closing (2 mins) Homework:

Listen and take note of the homework.

Reminders:

Listen and take note.

Goodbye!

Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth

362